<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<!-- header_tag -->
<html lang="en">
<head>
<title>LilyPond snippets</title>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
<meta name="description" content="LilyPond snippets">
<meta name="generator" content="makeinfo 4.11">
<link title="Top" rel="top" href="#Top">
<link href="http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/" rel="generator-home" title="Texinfo Homepage">
<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css">
<style type="text/css"><!--
pre.display { font-family:inherit }
pre.format { font-family:inherit }
pre.smalldisplay { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller }
pre.smallformat { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller }
pre.smallexample { font-size:smaller }
pre.smalllisp { font-size:smaller }
span.sc { font-variant:small-caps }
span.roman { font-family:serif; font-weight:normal; }
span.sansserif { font-family:sans-serif; font-weight:normal; }
hr { border:0; height:1; color: #000000; background-color: #000000; }
/* hr {
border: none;
height: 1px;
color: #666666;
background-color: #666666;
}
body {
border-left: 1px solid #666666;
border-right: 1px solid #666666;
color: #332d28;
margin-right: auto;
margin-left: auto;
width: 60em;
list-style-type: square;
font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;
padding-right: 1em;
padding-left: 1em;
}
a {
border-bottom: 1px dashed #344242;
text-decoration: none;
color: #344242;
}
a:link {
text-decoration: none;
}
a:visited {
border-bottom: 1px dashed #666666;
color: #666666;
}
a:active {
border-bottom: 1px solid #00cccc;
color: #00cccc;
}
a:hover {
border-bottom: 1px solid #1d7b85;
color: #1d7b85;
}
blockquote {
border: 1px solid #cccccc;
padding: 3px;
width: 40em;
}
.node {
border-left: 1px solid #666666;
margin: -0.5em 0px 1em;
padding: 2px 1px 0px;
font-style: italic;
}
.node a {
border: none;
text-decoration: underline;
font-style: normal;
font-weight: bold;
}
.verbatim {
font-family: "Courier New",Courier,monospace;
}
.unnumberedsubsubsec {
font-size: large;
color: #1d7b85;
}
.subsubheading {
font-size: large;
color: #3b220d;
}
.contents {
border: 1px dashed #339999;
margin: 3px 2em;
list-style-type: square;
padding-right: 1em;
width: 40em;
background-color: #fcfff9;
}
.contents a {
border-bottom: 1px dashed #423d34;
text-decoration: none;
color: #423d34;
}
.contents a:visited {
border-bottom: 1px dashed #666666;
color: #666666;
}
.contents a:active {
border-bottom: 1px solid #f0d86d;
color: #f0d86d;
}
.contents a:hover {
border-bottom: 1px solid #3b220d;
color: #3b220d;
}
.menu {
border-left: 1px dashed #339999;
margin: 3px 2em 1em;
list-style-type: square;
padding-left: 1.4em;
width: 40em;
}
.unnumbered {
}
h2 {
font-size: x-large;
color: #1d7b85;
}
*/
--></style>
</head>
<BODY BGCOLOR=WHITE TEXT=BLACK>
<h1 class="settitle">LilyPond snippets</h1>
<a name="Top"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">LilyPond Snippet List</h2>
<p>This document shows a selected set of LilyPond snippets from the
<a href="http://lsr.dsi.unimi.it">LilyPond Snippet Repository</a>
(LSR). It is in the public domain.
<p>Please note that it is not an exact subset of LSR: some snippets come
from <samp><span class="file">input/new</span></samp> LilyPond sources directory, and snippets from LSR
are converted through <samp><span class="command">convert-ly</span></samp>, as LSR is based on a stable
LilyPond version, and this document is for version 2.11.57.
<p>Snippets are grouped by tags; tags listed in the table of contents match
a section of LilyPond notation manual. Snippets may have several tags,
and not all LSR tags may appear in this document.
<p>In the HTML version of this document, you can click on the file name
or figure for each example to see the corresponding input file.
<!-- maybe generate/update @menu and @includes automatically? -jm -->
<!-- Please take care of naming every .itely -->
<!-- with an existing tag name. -->
<p><a name="Pitches"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Pitches</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Pitches">Pitches</a>.
<p><a name="adding-ambitus-per-voice.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding ambitus per voice</h3>
<p>Ambitus can be added per voice. In this case, the ambitus must be moved
manually to prevent collisions.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new Staff <<
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
} \relative c'' {
\override Ambitus #'X-offset = #2.0
\voiceOne
c4 a d e
f1
}
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
} \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
es4 f g as
b1
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4f/lily-6712adbe.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4f/lily-6712adbe.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ambitus-with-multiple-voices.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ambitus with multiple voices</h3>
<p>Adding the <code>Ambitus_engraver</code> to the <code>Staff</code> context creates
a single ambitus per staff, even in the case of staves with multiple
voices.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new Staff \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
}
<<
\new Voice \relative c'' {
\voiceOne
c4 a d e
f1
}
\new Voice \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
es4 f g as
b1
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f9/lily-1e5f126e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f9/lily-1e5f126e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="applying-note-head-styles-depending-on-the-step-of-the-scale.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Applying note head styles depending on the step of the scale</h3>
<p>The <code>shapeNoteStyles</code> property can be used to define various note
head styles for each step of the scale (as set by the key signature or
the "tonic" property). This property requires a set of symbols, which
can be purely arbitrary (geometrical expressions such as
<code>triangle</code>, <code>cross</code>, and <code>xcircle</code> are allowed) or based
on old American engraving tradition (some latin note names are also
allowed).
<p>That said, to imitate old American song books, there are several
predefined note head styles available through shortcut commands such as
<code>\aikenHeads</code> or <code>\sacredHarpHeads</code>.
<p>This example shows different ways to obtain shape note heads, and
demonstrates the ability to transpose a melody without losing the
correspondence between harmonic functions and note head styles.
<pre class="verbatim">
fragment = {
\key c \major
c2 d
e2 f
g2 a
b2 c
}
\score {
\new Staff {
\transpose c d
\relative c' {
\set shapeNoteStyles = #'#(do re mi fa #f la ti)
\fragment
}
\relative c' {
\set shapeNoteStyles = #'#(cross triangle fa #f mensural xcircle diamond)
\fragment
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2e/lily-520cfded.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2e/lily-520cfded.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-a-sequence-of-notes-on-various-pitches.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating a sequence of notes on various pitches</h3>
<p>In music that contains many occurrences of the same sequence of notes
at different pitches, the following music function may prove useful.
It takes a note, of which only the pitch is used. The supporting
Scheme functions were borrowed from the "Tips and tricks" document in
the manual for version 2.10. This example creates the rhythm used
throughout Mars, from Gustav Holst's The Planets.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define (make-note-req p d)
(make-music 'NoteEvent
'duration d
'pitch p))
#(define (make-note p d)
(make-music 'EventChord
'elements (list (make-note-req p d))))
#(define (seq-music-list elts)
(make-music 'SequentialMusic
'elements elts))
#(define (make-triplet elt)
(make-music 'TimeScaledMusic
'denominator 3
'numerator 2
'element elt))
rhythm = #(define-music-function (parser location note) (ly:music?)
"Make the rhythm in Mars (the Planets) at the given note's pitch"
(let* ((p (ly:music-property
(car (ly:music-property note 'elements))
'pitch)))
(seq-music-list (list
(make-triplet (seq-music-list (list
(make-note p (ly:make-duration 3 0 2 3))
(make-note p (ly:make-duration 3 0 2 3))
(make-note p (ly:make-duration 3 0 2 3))
)))
(make-note p (ly:make-duration 2 0))
(make-note p (ly:make-duration 2 0))
(make-note p (ly:make-duration 3 0))
(make-note p (ly:make-duration 3 0))
(make-note p (ly:make-duration 2 0))
))))
\score {
\new Staff {
\time 5/4
\rhythm c'
\rhythm c''
\rhythm g
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e1/lily-fcad03a4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e1/lily-fcad03a4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="dodecaphonic-style-accidentals-for-each-note-including-naturals.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Dodecaphonic-style accidentals for each note including naturals</h3>
<p>In early 20th century works, starting with Schoenberg, Berg and Webern
(the "Second" Viennese school), every pitch in the twelve-tone scale
has to be regarded as equal, without any hierarchy such as the
classical (tonal) degrees. Therefore, these composers print one
accidental for each note, even at natural pitches, to emphasize their
new approach to music theory and language.
<p>This snippet shows how to achieve such notation rules.
<pre class="verbatim">
webernAccidentals = {
% the 5s are just "a value different from any accidental"
\set Staff.keySignature = #'((0 . 5) (1 . 5) (2 . 5) (3 . 5)
(4 . 5) (5 . 5) (6 . 5))
\set Staff.extraNatural = ##f
#(set-accidental-style 'forget)
}
\score {
{
\webernAccidentals
c'4 dis' cis' cis'
c'4 dis' cis' cis'
c'4 c' dis' des'
}
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Key_engraver"
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="55/lily-b8124a15.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="55/lily-b8124a15.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="generating-random-notes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Generating random notes</h3>
<p>This Scheme-based snippet generates 24 random notes (or as many as
required), based on the current time (or any randomish number specified
instead, in order to obtain the same random notes each time): i.e., to
get different random note patterns, just change this number.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
{ #(let ((random-state (seed->random-state (current-time))))
(ly:export
(make-music 'SequentialMusic 'elements
(map (lambda x
(let ((idx (random 12 random-state)))
(make-music 'EventChord
'elements (list (make-music 'NoteEvent
'duration (ly:make-duration 2 0 1 1)
'pitch (ly:make-pitch (quotient idx 7)
(remainder idx 7)
0))))))
(make-list 24)))))
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="35/lily-cbf7db8d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="35/lily-cbf7db8d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="makam.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Makam</h3>
<p>Makam is a type of melody from Turkey using 1/9th-tone
microtonal alterations. Consult the initialization file
<code>makam-init.ly</code> (see the `Learning Manual 2.11.57,
4.6.3 Other sources of information' for the location of this file)
for details of pitch names and alterations.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Initialize makam settings
\include "makam-init.ly"
\relative c' {
\set Staff.keySignature = #`((3 . ,BAKIYE) (6 . ,(- KOMA)))
c4 cc db fk
gbm4 gfc gfb efk
fk4 db cc c
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="5a/lily-1889f4f6.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="5a/lily-1889f4f6.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="non-traditional-key-signatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Non-traditional key signatures</h3>
<p>The commonly used <code>\key</code> command sets the <code>keySignature</code>
property, in the <code>Staff</code> context.
<p>To create non-standard key signatures, set this property directly. The
format of this command is a list:
<p><code> \set Staff.keySignature = #`(((octave . step) . alter) ((octave
. step) . alter) ...) </code> where, for each element in the list,
<code>octave</code> specifies the octave (0 being the octave from middle C to
the B above), <code>step</code> specifies the note within the octave (0 means
C and 6 means B), and <code>alter</code> is <code>,SHARP ,FLAT ,DOUBLE-SHARP</code>
etc. (Note the leading comma.)
<p>Alternatively, for each item in the list, using the more concise format
<code>(step . alter)</code> specifies that the same alteration should hold in
all octaves.
<p>Here is an example of a possible key signature for generating a
whole-tone scale:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\set Staff.keySignature = #`(((0 . 3) . ,SHARP) ((0 . 5) . ,FLAT) ((0 . 6) . ,FLAT))
c4 d e fis
aes4 bes c2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="02/lily-2e1932b1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="02/lily-2e1932b1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ottava-text.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ottava text</h3>
<p>Internally, the <code>set-octavation</code> function sets the properties
<code>ottavation</code> (for example, to <code>"8va"</code> or <code>"8vb"</code>)
and <code>middleCPosition</code>. To override the text of the bracket, set
<code>ottavation</code> after invoking <code>set-octavation</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\ottava #1
\set Staff.ottavation = #"8"
c''1
\ottava #0
c'1
\ottava #1
\set Staff.ottavation = #"Text"
c''1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f1/lily-d72a333b.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f1/lily-d72a333b.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="preventing-extra-naturals-from-being-automatically-added.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Preventing extra naturals from being automatically added</h3>
<p>In accordance with standard typesetting rules, a natural sign is
printed before a sharp or flat if a previous accidental on the same
note needs to be canceled. To change this behavior, set the
<code>extraNatural</code> property to "false" in the <code>Staff</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
aeses4 aes ais a
\set Staff.extraNatural = ##f
aeses4 aes ais a
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a8/lily-0ff700ea.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a8/lily-0ff700ea.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="preventing-natural-signs-from-being-printed-when-the-key-signature-changes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Preventing natural signs from being printed when the key signature changes</h3>
<p>When the key signature changes, natural signs are automatically printed
to cancel any accidentals from previous key signatures. This may be
prevented by setting to "false" the <code>printKeyCancellation</code>
property in the <code>Staff</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\key d \major
a4 b cis d
\key g \minor
a4 bes c d
\set Staff.printKeyCancellation = ##f
\key d \major
a4 b cis d
\key g \minor
a4 bes c d
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="56/lily-148684fe.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="56/lily-148684fe.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="quoting-another-voice-with-transposition.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Quoting another voice with transposition</h3>
<p>Quotations take into account the transposition of both
source and target. In this example, all instruments play sounding
middle C; the target is an instrument in F. The target part may be
transposed using <code>\transpose</code>. In this case, all the pitches
(including the quoted ones) are transposed.
<pre class="verbatim">
\addQuote clarinet {
\transposition bes
\repeat unfold 8 { d'16 d' d'8 }
}
\addQuote sax {
\transposition es'
\repeat unfold 16 { a8 }
}
quoteTest = {
% french horn
\transposition f
g'4
<< \quoteDuring #"clarinet" { \skip 4 } s4^"clar." >>
<< \quoteDuring #"sax" { \skip 4 } s4^"sax." >>
g'4
}
{
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup \center-column { Horn \line { in F } }
\quoteTest
\transpose c' d' << \quoteTest s4_"up a tone" >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9f/lily-2747fcc3.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9f/lily-2747fcc3.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="transposing-pitches-with-minimum-accidentals-smart-transpose.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Transposing music with minimum accidentals</h3>
<p>This example uses some Scheme code to enforce enharmonic
modifications for notes in order to have the minimum number of
accidentals. In this case, the following rules apply:
<ul>
<li>Double accidentals should be removed
<li>B sharp -> C
<li>E sharp -> F
<li>C flat -> B
<li>F flat -> E
</ul>
<p>In this manner, the most natural enharmonic notes are chosen.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define (naturalize-pitch p)
(let* ((o (ly:pitch-octave p))
(a (* 4 (ly:pitch-alteration p)))
; alteration, a, in quarter tone steps, for historical reasons
(n (ly:pitch-notename p)))
(cond
((and (> a 1) (or (eq? n 6) (eq? n 2)))
(set! a (- a 2))
(set! n (+ n 1)))
((and (< a -1) (or (eq? n 0) (eq? n 3)))
(set! a (+ a 2))
(set! n (- n 1))))
(cond
((> a 2) (set! a (- a 4)) (set! n (+ n 1)))
((< a -2) (set! a (+ a 4)) (set! n (- n 1))))
(if (< n 0) (begin (set! o (- o 1)) (set! n (+ n 7))))
(if (> n 6) (begin (set! o (+ o 1)) (set! n (- n 7))))
(ly:make-pitch o n (/ a 4))))
#(define (naturalize music)
(let* ((es (ly:music-property music 'elements))
(e (ly:music-property music 'element))
(p (ly:music-property music 'pitch)))
(if (pair? es)
(ly:music-set-property!
music 'elements
(map (lambda (x) (naturalize x)) es)))
(if (ly:music? e)
(ly:music-set-property!
music 'element
(naturalize e)))
(if (ly:pitch? p)
(begin
(set! p (naturalize-pitch p))
(ly:music-set-property! music 'pitch p)))
music))
naturalizeMusic =
#(define-music-function (parser location m)
(ly:music?)
(naturalize m))
music = \relative c' { c4 d e g }
\score {
\new Staff {
\transpose c ais \music
\naturalizeMusic \transpose c ais \music
\transpose c deses \music
\naturalizeMusic \transpose c deses \music
}
\layout { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="47/lily-7f4c521f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="47/lily-7f4c521f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="tweaking-clef-properties.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Tweaking clef properties</h3>
<p>The command <code>\clef "treble_8"</code> is equivalent to setting
<code>clefGlyph</code>, <code>clefPosition</code> (which controls the vertical
position of the clef), <code>middleCPosition</code> and
<code>clefOctavation</code>. A clef is printed when any of the properties
except <code>middleCPosition</code> are changed.
<p>Note that changing the glyph, the position of the clef, or the
octavation does not in itself change the position of subsequent notes
on the staff: the position of middle C must also be specified to do
this. The positional parameters are relative to the staff center line,
positive numbers displacing upwards, counting one for each line and
space. The <code>clefOctavation</code> value would normally be set to 7, -7,
15 or -15, but other values are valid.
<p>When a clef change takes place at a line break the new clef symbol is
printed at both the end of the previous line and the beginning of the
new line by default. If the warning clef at the end of the previous
line is not required it can be suppressed by setting the <code>Staff</code>
property <code>explicitClefVisibility</code> to the value
<code>end-of-line-invisible</code>. The default behavior can be recovered
with <code>\unset Staff.explicitClefVisibility</code>.
<p>The following examples show the possibilities when setting these
properties manually. On the first line, the manual changes preserve the
standard relative positioning of clefs and notes, whereas on the second
line, they do not.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
% The default treble clef
c'1
% The standard bass clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.F"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #2
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #6
c'1
% The baritone clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.C"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #4
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #4
c'1
% The standard choral tenor clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.G"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #-2
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #-7
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #1
c'1
% A non-standard clef
\set Staff.clefPosition = #0
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #0
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-4
c'1 \break
% The following clef changes do not preserve
% the normal relationship between notes and clefs:
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.F"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #2
c'1
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.G"
c'1
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.C"
c'1
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #7
c'1
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #0
\set Staff.clefPosition = #0
c'1
% Here we go back to the normal clef:
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #0
c'1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="60/lily-919dc097.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="60/lily-919dc097.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Rhythms"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Rhythms</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Rhythms">Rhythms</a>.
<p><a name="adding-beams,-slurs,-ties-etc.-when-using-tuplet-and-non-tuplet-rythms..ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding beams, slurs, ties etc. when using tuplet and non-tuplet rythms.</h3>
<p>LilyPond syntax can involve many unusual placements for parentheses,
brackets etc., which might sometimes have to be interleaved. For
example, when entering a manual beam, the left square bracket has to be
placed after the starting note and its duration, not before. Similarly,
the right square bracket should directly follow the note which is to be
at the end of the requested beaming, even if this note happens to be
inside a tuplet section. This snippet demonstrates how to combine
manual beaming, manual slurs, ties and phrasing slurs with tuplet
sections (enclosed within curly braces).
<pre class="verbatim">
{
r16[ g16 \times 2/3 { r16 e'8] }
g16( a \times 2/3 { b d e') }
g8[( a \times 2/3 { b d') e']~ }
\time 2/4
\times 4/5 { e'32\( a b d' e' } a'4.\)
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="bb/lily-e9acede9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="bb/lily-e9acede9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adding-drum-parts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding drum parts</h3>
<p>Using the powerful pre-configured tools such as the <code>\drummode</code>
function and the <code>DrumStaff</code> context, inputting drum parts is
quite easy: drums are placed at their own staff positions (with a
special clef symbol) and have note heads according to the drum.
Attaching an extra symbol to the drum or restricting the number of
lines is possible.
<pre class="verbatim">
drh = \drummode { cymc4.^"crash" hhc16^"h.h." hh hhc8 hho hhc8 hh16 hh hhc4 r4 r2 }
drl = \drummode { bd4 sn8 bd bd4 << bd ss >> bd8 tommh tommh bd toml toml bd tomfh16 tomfh }
timb = \drummode { timh4 ssh timl8 ssh r timh r4 ssh8 timl r4 cb8 cb }
\score {
<<
\new DrumStaff \with {
drumStyleTable = #timbales-style
\override StaffSymbol #'line-count = #2
\override BarLine #'bar-size = #2
} <<
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"timbales"
\timb
>>
\new DrumStaff <<
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"drums"
\new DrumVoice { \stemUp \drh }
\new DrumVoice { \stemDown \drl }
>>
>>
\layout { }
\midi {
\context {
\Score
tempoWholesPerMinute = #(ly:make-moment 120 4)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2e/lily-5b0f4aab.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2e/lily-5b0f4aab.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="automatic-beam-subdivisions.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Automatic beam subdivisions</h3>
<p>Beams can be subdivided automatically. By setting the property
<code>subdivideBeams</code>, beams are subdivided at beat positions (as
specified in <code>beatLength</code>).
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new Staff \relative c'' {
<< {
\voiceOne
\set subdivideBeams = ##t
b32[ a g f c' b a g b^"subdivide beams" a g f c' b a g]
\oneVoice
}
\new Voice {
\voiceTwo
b32_"default"[ a g f c' b a g b a g f c' b a g]
} >>
\set beatLength = #(ly:make-moment 1 8)
b32^"beatLength 1 8"[ a g f c' b a g]
\set beatLength = #(ly:make-moment 1 16)
b32^"beatLength 1 16"[ a g f c' b a g]
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="51/lily-143fd117.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="51/lily-143fd117.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="automatic-beams-two-per-two-in-4-4-or-2-2-time-signature.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Automatic beams two per two in 4/4 or 2/2 time signature</h3>
<p>In a simple time signature of 2/2 or 4/4, 8th notes are beamed by
default as two sets of four.
<p>Using a macro which overrides the autobeaming behavior, this snippet
changes the beaming to quarter note beats.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Automatic beams two per two in 4/4 or 2/2 time signature
% _____
% Default | | | |
% _ _
% Required | | | |
% macro for beamed two per two in 2/2 and 4/4 time signature
qBeam = {
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 * *) 1 4 'Staff)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 * *) 2 4 'Staff)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 * *) 3 4 'Staff)
}
\score {
<<
\new Staff \relative c'' {
\time 4/4
g8^\markup { without the macro } g g g g g g g
g8 g g g4 g8 g g
}
%Use the macro
\new Staff \relative c'' {
\time 4/4
\qBeam
g8^\markup { with the macro } g g g g g g g
g8 g g g4 g8 g g
}
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\override TimeSignature #'style = #'()
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="82/lily-68049e60.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="82/lily-68049e60.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="beams-across-line-breaks.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Beams across line breaks</h3>
<p>By default, beams can't be printed across line breaks. This behavior
can be overridden by setting the <code>breakable</code> property.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
\relative c'' {
\override Score.Beam #'breakable = ##t
\time 3/16
c16[ d e \break
f16] r r
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2e/lily-842aad5d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2e/lily-842aad5d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-form-of-multi--measure-rests.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing form of multi-measure rests</h3>
<p>If there are ten or fewer measures of rests, a series of longa
and breve rests (called in German "Kirchenpausen" - church rests)
is printed within the staff; otherwise a simple line is shown.
This default number of ten may be changed by overriding the
<code>expand-limit</code> property:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\compressFullBarRests
R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9
\override MultiMeasureRest #'expand-limit = 3
R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="08/lily-6df2a91f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="08/lily-6df2a91f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-text-and-spanner-styles-for-text-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing text and spanner styles for text dynamics</h3>
<p>The text used for crescendos and decrescendos can be
changed by modifying the context properties <code>crescendoText</code>
and <code>decrescendoText</code>. The style of the spanner line can
be changed by modifying the <code>'style</code> property of
<code>DynamicTextSpanner</code>. The default value is
<code>'hairpin</code>, and other possible values include
<code>'line</code>, <code>'dashed-line</code>, and
<code>'dotted-line</code>:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\set crescendoText = \markup { \italic { cresc. poco } }
\set crescendoSpanner = #'text
\override DynamicTextSpanner #'style = #'dotted-line
a2\< a
a2 a
a2 a
a2 a\mf
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ab/lily-453c0505.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ab/lily-453c0505.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-tuplet-number.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the tuplet number</h3>
<p>By default, only the numerator of the tuplet number is printed over the
tuplet bracket, i.e., the denominator of the argument to the
<code>\times</code> command. Alternatively, num:den of the tuplet number may
be printed, or the tuplet number may be suppressed altogether.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\times 2/3 { c8 c c } \times 2/3 { c8 c c }
\override TupletNumber #'text = #tuplet-number::calc-fraction-text
\times 2/3 { c8 c c }
\override TupletNumber #'stencil = ##f
\times 2/3 { c8 c c }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="88/lily-e19f06cf.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="88/lily-e19f06cf.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-time-signatures-inside-a-polymetric-section-using-scaledurations.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing time signatures inside a polymetric section using <code>\scaleDurations</code></h3>
<p>The <code>measureLength</code> property, together with
<code>measurePosition</code>, determines when a bar line is needed. However,
when using <code>\scaleDurations</code>, the scaling of durations makes it
difficult to change time signatures. In this case, <code>measureLength</code>
should be set manually, using the <code>ly:make-moment</code> callback. The
second argument must be the same as the second argument of
<code>\scaleDurations</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Timing_translator"
\remove "Default_bar_line_engraver"
}
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Timing_translator"
\consists "Default_bar_line_engraver"
}
}
<<
\new Staff {
\scaleDurations #'(8 . 5) {
\time 6/8
\set Timing.measureLength = #(ly:make-moment 3 5)
b8 b b b b b
\time 2/4
\set Timing.measureLength = #(ly:make-moment 2 5)
b4 b
}
}
\new Staff {
\clef bass
\time 2/4
c2 d e f
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9e/lily-7717a836.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9e/lily-7717a836.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="chant-or-psalms-notation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Chant or psalms notation</h3>
<p>This form of notation is used for the chant of the Psalms, where verses
aren't always the same length.
<pre class="verbatim">
stemOn = { \override Staff.Stem #'transparent = ##f }
stemOff = { \override Staff.Stem #'transparent = ##t }
\score {
\new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" }
{
\key g \minor
\set Score.timing = ##f
\stemOff a'\breve bes'4 g'4
\stemOn a'2 \bar "||"
\stemOff a'\breve g'4 a'4
\stemOn f'2 \bar "||"
\stemOff a'\breve^\markup { \italic flexe }
\stemOn g'2 \bar "||"
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="36/lily-43a8112c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="36/lily-43a8112c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="compound-time-signatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Compound time signatures</h3>
<p>Odd 20th century time signatures (such as "5/8") can often be played
as compound time signatures (e.g. "3/8 + 2/8"), which combine two or
more inequal metrics. LilyPond can make such music quite easy to read
and play, by explicitly printing the compound time signatures and
adapting the automatic beaming behavior. (Graphic measure grouping
indications can also be added; see the appropriate snippet in this
database.)
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define (compound-time one two num)
(markup #:override '(baseline-skip . 0) #:number
(#:line ((#:column (one num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (two num))))
))
\relative {
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = #ly:text-interface::print
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'text = #(compound-time "2" "3" "8")
\time 5/8
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 5 8) 1 4)
c8 d e fis gis
c8 fis, gis e d
c8 d e4 gis8
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="cb/lily-64039b33.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="cb/lily-64039b33.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="conducting-signs,-measure-grouping-signs.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Conducting signs, measure grouping signs</h3>
<p>The Scheme function <code>set-time-signature</code>, in combination with the
<code>Measure_grouping_engraver</code>, creates measure grouping signs. Such
signs ease reading rhythmically complex modern music. In the following
example, the 9/8 measure is subdivided into 2, 2, 2 and 3 beats. This
is passed to <code>set-time-signature</code> as the third argument <code>(2 2
2 3)</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\relative c'' {
#(set-time-signature 9 8 '(2 2 2 3))
#(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 9 8) 3 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 9 8) 1 4)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 9 8) 2 4)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 9 8) 3 4)
g8 g d d g g a( bes g) |
#(set-time-signature 5 8 '(3 2))
a4. g4
}
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Measure_grouping_engraver"
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="3a/lily-bad1fe7d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="3a/lily-bad1fe7d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="controlling-tuplet-bracket-visibility.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Controlling tuplet bracket visibility</h3>
<p>The default behavior of tuplet-bracket visibility is to print a bracket
unless there is a beam of the same length as the tuplet. To control the
visibility of tuplet brackets, set the property <code>TupletBracket
#'bracket-visibility</code> to either <code>##t</code> (always print a bracket),
<code>##f</code> (never print a bracket) or <code>#'if-no-beam</code> (only print a
bracket if there is no beam).
<pre class="verbatim">
mus = \relative c'' {
\times 2/3 { c16[ d e } f8]
\times 2/3 { c8 d e }
\times 2/3 { c4 d e }
}
\new Voice \relative c'{
<< \mus s4^"default" >>
\override TupletBracket #'bracket-visibility = #'if-no-beam
<< \mus s4^"'if-no-beam" >>
\override TupletBracket #'bracket-visibility = ##t
<< \mus s4^"#t" >>
\override TupletBracket #'bracket-visibility = ##f
<< \mus s4^"#f" >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="08/lily-6e556f99.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="08/lily-6e556f99.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="engraving-ties-manually.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Engraving ties manually</h3>
<p>Ties may be engraved manually by changing the <code>tie-configuration</code>
property of the <code>TieColumn</code> object. The first number indicates the
distance from the center of the staff in staff-spaces, and the second
number indicates the direction (1 = up, -1 = down).
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<c e g>2 ~ <c e g>
\override TieColumn #'tie-configuration =
#'((0.0 . 1) (-2.0 . 1) (-4.0 . 1))
<c e g> ~ <c e g>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="44/lily-6cba5093.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="44/lily-6cba5093.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="entering-several-tuplets-using-only-one--times-command.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Entering several tuplets using only one \times command</h3>
<p>The property <code>tupletSpannerDuration</code> sets how long each of the
tuplets contained within the brackets after <code>\times</code> should last.
Many consecutive tuplets can then be placed within a single
<code>\times</code> expression, thus saving typing.
<p>In the example, two triplets are shown, while <code>\times</code> was
entered only once.
<p>For more information about <code>make-moment</code>, see "Time
administration".
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\time 2/4
\set tupletSpannerDuration = #(ly:make-moment 1 4)
\times 2/3 { c8 c c c c c }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="68/lily-5f869ce6.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="68/lily-5f869ce6.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="forcing-rehearsal-marks-to-start-from-a-given-letter-or-number.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Forcing rehearsal marks to start from a given letter or number</h3>
<p>This snippet demonstrates how to obtain automatic ordered rehearsal
marks, but from the letter or number you want.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c''{
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark #14
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
\break
\set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-numbers
c1 \mark #1
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark #14
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
c1 \mark \default
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="dc/lily-0a6e504d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="dc/lily-0a6e504d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="heavily-customized-polymetric-time-signatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Heavily customized polymetric time signatures</h3>
<p>Though the polymetric time signature shown was not the most essential
item here, it has been included to show the beat of this piece (which
is the template of a real Balkan song!).
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define (set-time-signature one two three four five six seven eight nine ten
eleven num)
(markup #:override '(baseline-skip . 0) #:number
(#:line ((#:column (one num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (two num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (three num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (four num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (five num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (six num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (seven num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (eight num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (nine num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (ten num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (eleven num))))
))
melody = \relative c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bb Sop."
\key g \major
\time 25/8
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = #ly:text-interface::print
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'text = #(set-time-signature "3" "2" "2" "3"
"2" "2" "2" "2" "3" "2" "2" "8" )
\set Staff.beatGrouping = #'(3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 3 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 5 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 7 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 10 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 12 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 14 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 16 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 18 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 21 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 23 8)
c8 c c d4 c8 c b c b a4 g fis8 e d c b' c d e4-^ fis8 g \break
c,4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4
c4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4 \break
c4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4
c4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4 \break
}
drum = \new DrumStaff \drummode {
\bar "|:" bd4.^\markup { "Drums" } sn4 bd \bar ":" sn4.
bd4 sn \bar ":" bd sn bd4. sn4 bd \bar ":|"
}
{
\melody
\drum
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="24/lily-302b7020.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="24/lily-302b7020.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="making-an-object-invisible-with-the-transparent-property.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Making an object invisible with the transparent property</h3>
<p>Setting the <code>transparent</code> property will cause an object to be
printed in "invisible ink": the object is not printed, but all its
other behavior is retained. The object still takes up space, it takes
part in collisions, and slurs, ties and beams can be attached to it.
<p>This snippet demonstrates how to connect different voices using ties.
Normally, ties only connect two notes in the same voice. By
introducing a tie in a different voice, and blanking the first up-stem
in that voice, the tie appears to cross voices. To prevent the blanked stem's
flag from interfering with tie positioning, the stem is extended.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\time 2/4
<< {
\once \override Stem #'transparent = ##t
\once \override Stem #'length = #8
b8 ~ b\noBeam
\once \override Stem #'transparent = ##t
\once \override Stem #'length = #8
g8 ~ g\noBeam
} \\ {
b8 g g e
} >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="74/lily-ed1461a4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="74/lily-ed1461a4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="manually-controlling-beam-positions.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Manually controlling beam positions</h3>
<p>Beam positions may be controlled manually, by overriding the
<code>positions</code> setting of the <code>Beam</code> grob.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\time 2/4
% from upper staffline (position 4) to center (position 0)
\override Beam #'positions = #'(2 . 0)
c8 c
% from center to one above center (position 2)
\override Beam #'positions = #'(0 . 1)
c8 c
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="5f/lily-7c61b35b.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="5f/lily-7c61b35b.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="merging-multi-measure-rests-in-a-polyphonic-part.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Merging multi-measure rests in a polyphonic part</h3>
<p>When using multi-measure rests in a polyphonic staff, the rests will be
placed differently depending on the voice they belong to. However they
can be printed on the same staff line, using the following setting.
<pre class="verbatim">
normalPos= \revert MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position
{
<<
{
c''1
R1
c''1
\normalPos
R1
}
\\
{
c'1
R1
c'1
\normalPos
R1
}
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="47/lily-1943c5f7.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="47/lily-1943c5f7.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="modifying-tuplet-bracket-length.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Modifying tuplet bracket length</h3>
<p>Tuplet brackets can be made to run to prefatory matter or the next
note. Default tuplet brackets end at the right edge of the final note
of the tuplet; full-length tuplet brackets extend farther to the right,
either to cover all the non-rhythmic notation up to the following note,
or to cover only the whitespace before the next item of notation, be
that a clef, time signature, key signature, or another note. The
example shows how to switch tuplets to full length mode and how to
modify what material they cover.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new RhythmicStaff {
% Set tuplets to be extendable...
\set tupletFullLength = ##t
% ...to cover all items up to the next note
\set tupletFullLengthNote = ##t
\time 2/4
\times 2/3 { c4 c c }
% ...or to cover just whitespace
\set tupletFullLengthNote = ##f
\time 4/4
\times 4/5 { c4 c1 }
\time 3/4
c2.
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="08/lily-816eddcf.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="08/lily-816eddcf.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="permitting-line-breaks-within-beamed-tuplets.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Permitting line breaks within beamed tuplets</h3>
<p>This artificial example shows how both manual and automatic line breaks
may be permitted to within a beamed tuplet. Note that such off-beat
tuplets have to be beamed manually.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
\context {
\Voice
% Permit line breaks within tuplets
\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
% Allow beams to be broken at line breaks
\override Beam #'breakable = ##t
}
}
\relative c'' {
a8
\repeat unfold 8 { \times 2/3 { c[ b a] } }
% Insert a manual line break within a tuplet
\times 2/3 { c[ b \bar "" \break a] }
\repeat unfold 2 { \times 2/3 { c[ b a] } }
c8
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="6f/lily-b415dc2f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="6f/lily-b415dc2f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="positioning-multi--measure-rests.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Positioning multi-measure rests</h3>
<p>Unlike ordinary rests, there is no predefined command
to change the vertical position on the staff of a multi-measure
rest symbol of either form by attaching it to a note. However,
in polyphonic music multi-measure rests in odd-numbered and
even-numbered voices are vertically separated. The positioning
of multi-measure rests can be controlled as follows:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
% Multi-measure rests by default are set under the second line
R1
% They can be moved with an override
\override MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position = #-2
R1
% A value of 0 is the default position;
% the following trick moves the rest to the center line
\override MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position = #-0.01
R1
% Multi-measure rests in odd-numbered voices are under the top line
<< { R1 } \\ { a1 } >>
% Multi-measure rests in even-numbered voices are under the bottom line
<< { c1 } \\ { R1 } >>
% They remain separated even in empty measures
<< { R1 } \\ { R1 } >>
% This brings them together even though there are two voices
\compressFullBarRests
<<
\revert MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position
{ R1*3 }
\\
\revert MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position
{ R1*3 }
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="73/lily-ebd099b8.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="73/lily-ebd099b8.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-metronome-and-rehearsal-marks-below-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing metronome and rehearsal marks below the staff</h3>
<p>By default, metronome and rehearsal marks are printed above the staff.
To place them below the staff simply set the <code>direction</code> property
of <code>MetronomeMark</code> or <code>RehearsalMark</code> appropriately.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
{
% Metronome marks below the staff
\override Score.MetronomeMark #'direction = #DOWN
\tempo 8. = 120
c''1
% Rehearsal marks below the staff
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'direction = #DOWN
\mark \default
c''1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4a/lily-cfdefdd1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4a/lily-cfdefdd1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-music-with-different-time-signatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing music with different time signatures</h3>
<p>In the following snippet, two parts have a completely different time
signature, yet remain synchronized. The bar lines can no longer be
printed at the <code>Score</code> level; to allow independent bar lines in
each part, the <code>Barline_engraver</code> is moved from the <code>Score</code>
context to the <code>Staff</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
indent = #0
ragged-right = ##t
}
global = { \time 3/4 { s2.*3 } \bar "" \break { s2.*3 } }
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Timing_translator"
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Default_bar_line_engraver"
\override SpacingSpanner #'uniform-stretching = ##t
\override SpacingSpanner #'strict-note-spacing = ##t
proportionalNotationDuration = #(ly:make-moment 1 64)
}
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Timing_translator"
\consists "Default_bar_line_engraver"
\consists "Time_signature_engraver"
}
\context {
\Voice
\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
tupletFullLength = ##t
}
}
Bassklarinette = \new Staff <<
\global {
\bar "|"
\clef treble
\time 3/8
d''4.
\bar "|"
\time 3/4
r8 des''2( c''8)
\bar "|"
\time 7/8
r4. ees''2 ~
\bar "|"
\time 2/4
\tupletUp
\times 2/3 { ees''4 r4 d''4 ~ }
\bar "|"
\time 3/8
\tupletUp
\times 3/4 { d''4 r4 }
\bar "|"
\time 2/4
e''2
\bar "|"
\time 3/8
es''4.
\bar "|"
\time 3/4
r8 d''2 r8
\bar "|"
}
>>
Perkussion = \new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff <<
\global {
\bar "|"
\clef percussion
\time 3/4
r4 c'2 ~
\bar "|"
c'2.
\bar "|"
R2.
\bar "|"
r2 g'4 ~
\bar "|"
g'2. ~
\bar "|"
g'2.
}
>>
\new Staff <<
\global {
\bar "|"
\clef percussion
\time 3/4
R2.
\bar "|"
g'2. ~
\bar "|"
g'2.
\bar "|"
r4 g'2 ~
\bar "|"
g'2 r4
\bar "|"
g'2.
}
>>
>>
\score {
<< \Bassklarinette \Perkussion >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="46/lily-ccd9189a.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="46/lily-ccd9189a.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="rest-styles.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Rest styles</h3>
<p>Rests may be used in various styles.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
indent = 0.0
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
}
}
\relative c {
\set Score.timing = ##f
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'mensural
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { mensural }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'neomensural
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { neomensural }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'classical
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { classical }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'default
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { default }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b4/lily-5bfcd48c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b4/lily-5bfcd48c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="rhythmic-slashes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Rhythmic slashes</h3>
<p>In "simple" lead-sheets, sometimes no actual notes are written,
instead only "rhythmic patterns" and chords above the measures are
notated giving the structure of a song. Such a feature is for example
useful while creating/transcribing the structure of a song and also
when sharing lead sheets with guitarists or jazz musicians. The
standard support for this using <code>\repeat percent</code> is unsuitable
here since the first beat has to be an ordinary note or rest. This
example shows two solutions to this problem, by redefining ordinary
rests to be printed as slashes. (If the duration of each beat is not a
quarter note, replace the <code>r4</code> in the definitions with a rest of
the appropriate duration).
<pre class="verbatim">
% Macro to print single slash
rs = {
\once \override Rest #'stencil = #ly:percent-repeat-item-interface::beat-slash
\once \override Rest #'thickness = #'0.48
\once \override Rest #'slope = #'1.7
r4
}
% Function to print a specified number of slashes
comp = #(define-music-function (parser location count) ( integer?)
#{
\override Rest #'stencil = #ly:percent-repeat-item-interface::beat-slash
\override Rest #'thickness = #'0.48
\override Rest #'slope = #'1.7
\repeat unfold $count { r4 }
\revert Rest #'stencil
#}
)
\score{
\relative c' {
c d e f |
\rs \rs \rs \rs |
\comp #4 |
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="65/lily-23b8cebf.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="65/lily-23b8cebf.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="skips-in-lyric-mode-2.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Skips in lyric mode (2)</h3>
<p>Although <code>s</code> skips cannot be used in <code>\lyricmode</code> (it is
taken to be a literal "s", not a space), double quotes (<code>""</code>)
or underscores (<code>_</code>) are available.So for example:
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\relative c'' { a4 b c d }
\new Lyrics \lyricmode { a4 "" _ gap }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d8/lily-8cca9479.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d8/lily-8cca9479.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="skips-in-lyric-mode.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Skips in lyric mode</h3>
<p>The <code>s</code> syntax for skips is only available in note mode and chord
mode. In other situations, for example, when entering lyrics, using the
<code>\skip</code> command is recommended.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\relative { a'1 a }
\new Lyrics \lyricmode { \skip 1 bla1 }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="20/lily-845ca688.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="20/lily-845ca688.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="three-sided-box.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Three-sided box</h3>
<p>This example shows how to add a markup command to get a three sided box
around some text (or other markup).
<pre class="verbatim">
% New command to add a three sided box, with sides north, west and south
% Based on the box-stencil command defined in scm/stencil.scm
% Note that you use ";" to comment a line in Scheme
#(define-public (NWS-box-stencil stencil thickness padding)
"Add a box around STENCIL, producing a new stencil."
(let* ((x-ext (interval-widen (ly:stencil-extent stencil 0) padding))
(y-ext (interval-widen (ly:stencil-extent stencil 1) padding))
(y-rule (make-filled-box-stencil (cons 0 thickness) y-ext))
(x-rule (make-filled-box-stencil
(interval-widen x-ext thickness) (cons 0 thickness))))
; (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil X 1 y-rule padding))
(set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil X -1 y-rule padding))
(set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil Y 1 x-rule 0.0))
(set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil Y -1 x-rule 0.0))
stencil))
% The corresponding markup command, based on the \box command defined
% in scm/define-markup-commands.scm
#(define-markup-command (NWS-box layout props arg) (markup?)
"Draw a box round @var{arg}. Looks at @code{thickness},
@code{box-padding} and @code{font-size} properties to determine line
thickness and padding around the markup."
(let* ((th (chain-assoc-get 'thickness props 0.1))
(size (chain-assoc-get 'font-size props 0))
(pad (* (magstep size)
(chain-assoc-get 'box-padding props 0.2)))
(m (interpret-markup layout props arg)))
(NWS-box-stencil m th pad)))
% Test it:
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c' {
c2^\markup { \NWS-box ABCD }
c^\markup { \NWS-box \note #"4" #1.0 }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ea/lily-0cb168f8.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ea/lily-0cb168f8.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="using-ties-with-arpeggios.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Using ties with arpeggios</h3>
<p>Ties are sometimes used to write out arpeggios. In this case, two tied
notes need not be consecutive. This can be achieved by setting the
<code>tieWaitForNote</code> property to "true". The same feature is also
useful, for example, to tie a tremolo to a chord, but in principle, it
can also be used for ordinary consecutive notes, as demonstrated in
this example.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\set tieWaitForNote = ##t
\grace { c16[~ e~ g]~ } <c, e g>2
\repeat tremolo 8 { c32~ c'~ } <c c,>1
e8~ c~ a~ f~ <e' c a f>2
\tieUp c8~ a \tieDown \tieDotted g~ c g2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ef/lily-0d5306d7.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ef/lily-0d5306d7.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Expressive-marks"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Expressive marks</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Expressive-marks">Expressive marks</a>.
<p><a name="adding-beams,-slurs,-ties-etc.-when-using-tuplet-and-non-tuplet-rythms..ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding beams, slurs, ties etc. when using tuplet and non-tuplet rythms.</h3>
<p>LilyPond syntax can involve many unusual placements for parentheses,
brackets etc., which might sometimes have to be interleaved. For
example, when entering a manual beam, the left square bracket has to be
placed after the starting note and its duration, not before. Similarly,
the right square bracket should directly follow the note which is to be
at the end of the requested beaming, even if this note happens to be
inside a tuplet section. This snippet demonstrates how to combine
manual beaming, manual slurs, ties and phrasing slurs with tuplet
sections (enclosed within curly braces).
<pre class="verbatim">
{
r16[ g16 \times 2/3 { r16 e'8] }
g16( a \times 2/3 { b d e') }
g8[( a \times 2/3 { b d') e']~ }
\time 2/4
\times 4/5 { e'32\( a b d' e' } a'4.\)
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="bb/lily-e9acede9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="bb/lily-e9acede9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adding-parentheses-around-an-expressive-mark-or-chordal-note.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding parentheses around an expressive mark or chordal note</h3>
<p>The <code>\parenthesize</code> function is a special tweak that encloses
objects in parentheses. The associated grob is
<code>Score.ParenthesesItem</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
c2-\parenthesize ->
\override ParenthesesItem #'padding = #0.1
\override ParenthesesItem #'font-size = #-4
<d \parenthesize fis a>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8a/lily-5b0684ab.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8a/lily-5b0684ab.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adjusting-the-shape-of-falls-and-doits.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adjusting the shape of falls and doits</h3>
<p>The <code>shortest-duration-space</code> property may have to be tweaked to
adjust the shape of falls and doits.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override Score.SpacingSpanner #'shortest-duration-space = #4.0
c2-\bendAfter #+5
c2-\bendAfter #-3
c2-\bendAfter #+8
c2-\bendAfter #-6
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ef/lily-61f71c03.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ef/lily-61f71c03.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="broken-crescendo-hairpin.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Broken crescendo hairpin</h3>
<p>In order to make parts of a crescendo hairpin invisible, the following
method is used: A white rectangle is drawn on top of the respective
part of the crescendo hairpin, making it invisible. The rectangle is
defined as postscript code within a text markup.
<p>To fine-tune the position and size of the markup, the number
preceding <code>setgray</code> in the postscript definition can be set to a
value less than one, making it grey. The two numbers before <code>scale</code>
in the postscript code are responsible for the width and height of the
rectangle, the two numbers before <code>translate</code> change the x- and
y-origin of the rectangle.
<p>Make sure to put the hairpin in a lower layer than the text markup to
draw the rectangle over the hairpin.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<< {
\dynamicUp
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'staff-padding = #4
r2 r16 c'8.\pp r4
}
\\
{
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'layer = #0
des,2\mf\< ~
\override TextScript #'layer = #2
des16_\markup {
\postscript #"1.9 -8 translate 5 4 scale 1 setgray 0 0 moveto 0 1
lineto 1 1 lineto 1 0 lineto 0 0 lineto fill"
}
r8. des4 ~ des16->\sff
} >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="06/lily-4c3ef3b4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="06/lily-4c3ef3b4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="caesura-railtracks-with-fermata.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Caesura ("railtracks") with fermata</h3>
<p>A caesura is sometimes denoted with a double "railtracks" breath mark
with a fermata sign positioned above. This snippet should present an
optically pleasing combination of railtracks and a fermata.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
c''2.
% construct the symbol
\override BreathingSign #'text = \markup {
\line {
\musicglyph #"scripts.caesura.curved"
\translate #'(-1.75 . 1.6)
\musicglyph #"scripts.ufermata"
}
}
\breathe c''4
% set the breathe mark back to normal
\revert BreathingSign #'text
c''2. \breathe c''4
\bar "|."
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c2/lily-16581e34.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c2/lily-16581e34.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="center-text-below-hairpin-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Center text below hairpin dynamics</h3>
<p>This example provides a function to typeset a hairpin (de)crescendo
with some additional text below it, such as "molto" or "poco". The
example also illustrates how to modify the way an object is normally
printed, using some Scheme code.
<pre class="verbatim">
hairpinWithCenteredText = #(define-music-function (parser location text) (markup?)
#{
\override Voice.Hairpin #'stencil = #(lambda (grob)
(ly:stencil-aligned-to
(ly:stencil-combine-at-edge
(ly:stencil-aligned-to (ly:hairpin::print grob) X CENTER)
Y DOWN
(ly:stencil-aligned-to (ly:text-interface::print grob) X CENTER))
X LEFT))
\override Voice.Hairpin #'text = $text
#})
hairpinMolto = \hairpinWithCenteredText \markup { \italic molto }
hairpinMore = \hairpinWithCenteredText \markup { \bigger moltissimo }
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
{
\hairpinMolto c'2\< c'\f
\hairpinMore c'2\< c'\f
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2f/lily-18ead2c8.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2f/lily-18ead2c8.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing--flageolet-mark-size.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing \flageolet mark size</h3>
<p>To make the <code>\flageolet</code> circle smaller use the following Scheme
function.
<pre class="verbatim">
smallFlageolet = #(let ((m (make-music 'ArticulationEvent
'articulation-type "flageolet")))
(set! (ly:music-property m 'tweaks)
(acons 'font-size -3
(ly:music-property m 'tweaks)))
m)
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c'' {
d4^\flageolet_\markup { default size } d_\flageolet
c4^\smallFlageolet_\markup { smaller } c_\smallFlageolet
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f0/lily-49d06399.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f0/lily-49d06399.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-text-and-spanner-styles-for-text-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing text and spanner styles for text dynamics</h3>
<p>The text used for crescendos and decrescendos can be
changed by modifying the context properties <code>crescendoText</code>
and <code>decrescendoText</code>. The style of the spanner line can
be changed by modifying the <code>'style</code> property of
<code>DynamicTextSpanner</code>. The default value is
<code>'hairpin</code>, and other possible values include
<code>'line</code>, <code>'dashed-line</code>, and
<code>'dotted-line</code>:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\set crescendoText = \markup { \italic { cresc. poco } }
\set crescendoSpanner = #'text
\override DynamicTextSpanner #'style = #'dotted-line
a2\< a
a2 a
a2 a
a2 a\mf
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ab/lily-453c0505.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ab/lily-453c0505.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-appearance-of-a-slur-from-solid-to-dotted-or-dashed.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the appearance of a slur from solid to dotted or dashed</h3>
<p>The appearance of slurs may be changed from solid to dotted or dashed.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
c4( d e c)
\slurDotted
c4( d e c)
\slurSolid
c4( d e c)
\slurDashed
c4( d e c)
\slurSolid
c4( d e c)
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="7e/lily-91555c1f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="7e/lily-91555c1f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-breath-mark-symbol.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the breath mark symbol</h3>
<p>The glyph of the breath mark can be tuned by overriding the text
property of the <code>BreathingSign</code> layout object with any markup
text.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
c2
\override BreathingSign #'text = \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.rvarcomma" }
\breathe
d2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a1/lily-b3d5cc04.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a1/lily-b3d5cc04.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="combining-dynamics-with-markup-texts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Combining dynamics with markup texts</h3>
<p>Some dynamics may involve text indications (such as "più forte" or
"piano subito"). They can be produced using a <code>\markup</code> block.
<pre class="verbatim">
piuF = \markup { \italic più \dynamic f }
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c'' {
c2\f c-\piuF
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8e/lily-cc388ac0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8e/lily-cc388ac0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="contemporary-glissando.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Contemporary glissando</h3>
<p>A contemporary glissando without a final note can be typeset using a
hidden note and cadenza timing.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\time 3/4
\override Glissando #'style = #'zigzag
c4 c
\cadenzaOn
c4\glissando
\hideNotes
c,,4
\unHideNotes
\cadenzaOff
\bar "|"
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a3/lily-c6856418.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a3/lily-c6856418.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="controlling-the-vertical-ordering-of-scripts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Controlling the vertical ordering of scripts</h3>
<p>The vertical ordering of scripts is controlled with the
<code>script-priority</code> property. The lower this number, the closer it
will be put to the note. In this example, the <code>TextScript</code> (the
sharp symbol) first has the lowest priority, so it is put lowest in the
first example. In the second, the prall trill (the <code>Script</code>) has
the lowest, so it is on the inside. When two objects have the same
priority, the order in which they are entered determines which one
comes first.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c''' {
\once \override TextScript #'script-priority = #-100
a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp }
\once \override Script #'script-priority = #-100
a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="df/lily-870d61d9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="df/lily-870d61d9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-arpeggios-across-notes-in-different-voices.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating arpeggios across notes in different voices</h3>
<p>An arpeggio can be drawn across notes in different voices on the same
staff if the <code>Span_arpeggio_engraver</code> is moved to the <code>Staff</code>
context:
<pre class="verbatim">
\new Staff \with {
\consists "Span_arpeggio_engraver"
}
\relative c' {
\set Staff.connectArpeggios = ##t
<<
{ <e' g>4\arpeggio <d f> <d f>2 } \\
{ <d, f>2\arpeggio <g b>2 }
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="6f/lily-bf2f4de9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="6f/lily-bf2f4de9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-cross-staff-arpeggios-in-a-piano-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating cross-staff arpeggios in a piano staff</h3>
<p>In a <code>PianoStaff</code>, it is possible to let an arpeggio cross between
the staves by setting the property <code>PianoStaff.connectArpeggios</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new PianoStaff \relative c'' <<
\set PianoStaff.connectArpeggios = ##t
\new Staff {
<c e g c>4\arpeggio
<g c e g>4\arpeggio
<e g c e>4\arpeggio
<c e g c>4\arpeggio
}
\new Staff {
\clef bass
\repeat unfold 4 {
<c,, e g c>4\arpeggio
}
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="92/lily-a3903623.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="92/lily-a3903623.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-cross-staff-arpeggios-in-other-contexts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating cross-staff arpeggios in other contexts</h3>
<p>Cross-staff arpeggios can be created in contexts other than
<code>PianoStaff</code> if the <code>Span_arpeggio_engraver</code> is included in
the <code>Score</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new StaffGroup {
\set Score.connectArpeggios = ##t
<<
\new Voice \relative c' {
<c e>2\arpeggio
<d f>2\arpeggio
<c e>1\arpeggio
}
\new Voice \relative c {
\clef bass
<c g'>2\arpeggio
<b g'>2\arpeggio
<c g'>1\arpeggio
}
>>
}
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\consists "Span_arpeggio_engraver"
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="84/lily-4a6ef4de.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="84/lily-4a6ef4de.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-real-parenthesized-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating "real" parenthesized dynamics</h3>
<p>Although the easiest way to add parentheses to a dynamic mark is to use
a <code>\markup</code> block, this method has a downside: the created
objects will behave like text markups, and not like dynamics.
<p>However, it is possible to create a similar object using the equivalent
Scheme code (as described in "Markup programmer interface"), combined
with the <code>make-dynamic-script</code> function. This way, the markup will
be regarded as a dynamic, and therefore will remain compatible with
commands such as <code>\dynamicUp</code> or <code>\dynamicDown</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper { ragged-right = ##t }
parenF = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:normal-text #:italic
#:fontsize 2 "(" #:hspace -0.8 #:dynamic "f" #:normal-text
#:italic #:fontsize 2 ")"
)))
\relative c'' {
c4\parenF c c \dynamicUp c\parenF
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="71/lily-7346f215.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="71/lily-7346f215.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-simultaneous-rehearsal-marks.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating simultaneous rehearsal marks</h3>
<p>Unlike text scripts, rehearsal marks cannot be stacked at a particular point
in a score: only one <code>RehearsalMark</code> object is created. Using an
invisible measure and bar line, an extra rehearsal mark can be added, giving
the appearance of two marks in the same column.
<p>This method may also prove useful for placing rehearsal marks at both the
end of one system and the start of the following system.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\key a \major
\set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-box-letters
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'outside-staff-priority = #5000
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(key-signature)
\mark \markup { \bold { Senza denti } }
% the hidden measure and bar line
\once \override Score.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
\time 1/16
s16 \bar ""
\time 4/4
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(bar-line)
\mark \markup { \box \bold Intro }
d'1
\mark \default
d'1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="3a/lily-6eac71b0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="3a/lily-6eac71b0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-slurs-across-voices.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating slurs across voices</h3>
<p>In some situations, it may be necessary to create slurs between notes
from different voices.
<p>The solution is to add invisible notes to one of the voices, using
<code>\hideNotes</code>.
<p>This example is measure 235 of the Ciaconna from Bach's 2nd Partita for
solo violin, BWV 1004.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<< {
d16( a') s a s a[ s a] s a[ s a]
}
\\
{
\slurUp
bes,16[ s e](
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes f[(
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes fis](
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes g[(
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes gis](
\hideNotes a)
} >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ce/lily-e9383e5e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ce/lily-e9383e5e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-text-spanners.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating text spanners</h3>
<p>The <code>\startTextSpan</code> and <code>\stopTextSpan</code> commands allow the
creation of text spanners as easily as pedal indications or
octavations. Override some properties of the <code>TextSpanner</code> object
to modify its output.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override TextSpanner #'edge-text = #'("bla" . "blu")
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\override TextSpanner #'dash-period = #2
\override TextSpanner #'dash-fraction = #0.0
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\revert TextSpanner #'style
\override TextSpanner #'style = #'dashed-line \override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'left #'text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . 1) }
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'right #'text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . -2) }
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-13
\override TextSpanner #'dash-period = #10
\override TextSpanner #'dash-fraction = #0.5
\override TextSpanner #'thickness = #10
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-6
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="97/lily-494f79c2.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="97/lily-494f79c2.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="hiding-the-extender-line-for-text-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Hiding the extender line for text dynamics</h3>
<p>Text style dynamic changes (such as cresc. and dim.) are printed with a
dashed line showing their extent. This line can be suppressed in the
following way:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override DynamicTextSpanner #'dash-period = #-1.0
\crescTextCresc
c1\< | d | b | c\!
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="39/lily-50e84808.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="39/lily-50e84808.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="horizontally-aligning-custom-dynamics-e.g.-sempre-pp,-piu-f,-subito-p.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Horizontally aligning custom dynamics (e.g. "sempre pp", "piu f", "subito p")</h3>
<p>Some dynamic expressions involve additional text, like "sempre pp".
Since lilypond aligns all dynamics centered on the note, the \pp would
be displayed way after the note it applies to.
<p>To correctly align the "sempre \pp" horizontally, so that it is
aligned as if it were only the \pp, there are several approaches:
<p>* Simply use <code>\once\override DynamicText #'X-offset = #-9.2</code>
before the note with the dynamics to manually shift it to the correct
position. Drawback: This has to be done manually each time you use that
dynamic markup... * Add some padding (<code>#:hspace 7.1</code>) into the
definition of your custom dynamic mark, so that after lilypond
center-aligns it, it is already correctly aligned. Drawback: The
padding really takes up that space and does not allow any other markup
or dynamics to be shown in that position.
<p>* Shift the dynamic script <code>\once\override ... #'X-offset = ..</code>.
Drawback: <code>\once\override</code> is needed for every invocation!
<p>* Set the dimensions of the additional text to 0 (using
<code>#:with-dimensions '(0 . 0) '(0 . 0)</code>). Drawback: To lilypond
"sempre" has no extent, so it might put other stuff there and create
collisions (which are not detected by the collision dection!). Also,
there seems to be some spacing, so it's not exactly the same alignment
as without the additional text
<p>* Add an explicit shifting directly inside the scheme function for the
dynamic-script.
<p>* Set an explicit alignment inside the dynamic-script. By default, this
won't have any effect, only if one sets X-offset! Drawback: One needs
to set <code>DynamicText #'X-offset</code>, which will apply to all dynamic
texts! Also, it is aligned at the right edge of the additional text,
not at the center of pp.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header { title = "Horizontally aligning custom dynamics" }
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
% Solution 1: Using a simple markup with a particular halign value
% Drawback: It's a markup, not a dynamic command, so \dynamicDown etc. will have no effect
semppMarkup = \markup { \halign #1.4 \italic "sempre" \dynamic "pp" }
% Solution 2: Using a dynamic script and shifting with \once\override ... #'X-offset = ..
% Drawback: \once\override needed for every invocation
semppK = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line( #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp")))
% Solution 3: Padding the dynamic script so the center-alignment puts it to the correct position
% Drawback: the padding really reserves the space, nothing else can be there
semppT = #(
make-dynamic-script (
markup #:line (
#:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp" #:hspace 7.1
)
)
)
% Solution 4: Dynamic, setting the dimensions of the additional text to 0
% Drawback: To lilypond "sempre" has no extent, so it might put other stuff there => collisions
% Drawback: Also, there seems to be some spacing, so it's not exactly the
% same alignment as without the additional text
semppM = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line( #:with-dimensions '(0 . 0) '(0 . 0) #:right-align #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp")))
% Solution 5: Dynamic with explicit shifting inside the scheme function
semppG = #(make-dynamic-script
(markup
#:hspace 0 #:translate (cons -18.85 0 )
#:line( #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))
)
% Solution 6: Dynamic with explicit alignment. This has only effect, if one sets X-offset!
% Drawback: One needs to set DynamicText #'X-offset!
% Drawback: Aligned at the right edge of the additional text, not at the center of pp
semppMII = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line(#:right-align #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp")))
\context StaffGroup <<
\context Staff="s" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Normal"
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4\pp c\p c c | c\ff c c\pp c }
>>
\context Staff="sMarkup" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Normal" "Markup"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4-\semppMarkup c\p c c | c\ff c c-\semppMarkup c}
>>
\context Staff="sK" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Explicit" "shifting"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major
\once \override DynamicText #'X-offset = #-9.2 c4\semppK c\p c c |
c\ff c \once \override DynamicText #'X-offset = #-9.2 c\semppK c }
>>
\context Staff="sT" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Right" "padding"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppT c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppT c }
>>
\context Staff="sM" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Setting" "dimension" "to zero"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppM c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppM c }
>>
\context Staff="sG" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Shifting" "inside" "dynamics"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppG c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppG c}
>>
\context Staff="sMII" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Alignment" "inside" "dynamics"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major
\override DynamicText #'X-offset = #0 % Setting to ##f (false) gives the same resul
c4\semppMII c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppMII c }
>>
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b8/lily-c29942a1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b8/lily-c29942a1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="inserting-a-caesura.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Inserting a caesura</h3>
<p>Caesura marks can be created by overriding the <code>'text</code>
property of the <code>BreathingSign</code> object. A curved caesura
mark is also available.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override BreathingSign #'text =
#(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.caesura.straight")
c8 e4. \breathe g8. e16 c4
\override BreathingSign #'text =
#(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.caesura.curved")
g8 e'4. \breathe g8. e16 c4
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="be/lily-8eab70c5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="be/lily-8eab70c5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="laissez-vibrer-ties.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Laissez vibrer ties</h3>
<p>Laissez vibrer ties have a fixed size. Their formatting can be tuned
using <code>'tie-configuration</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<c e g>4\laissezVibrer r <c f g>\laissezVibrer r
<c d f g>4\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4.\laissezVibrer r8
<c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r
\override LaissezVibrerTieColumn #'tie-configuration
= #`((-7 . ,DOWN)
(-5 . ,DOWN)
(-3 . ,UP)
(-1 . ,UP))
<c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="fd/lily-61b8d987.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="fd/lily-61b8d987.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="line-arrows.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Line arrows</h3>
<p>Arrows can be applied to text-spanners and line-spanners
(such as the Glissando).
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override TextSpanner #'bound-padding = #1.0
\override TextSpanner #'dash-fraction = #'()
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'right #'arrow = ##t
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'left #'text = #"fof"
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'right #'text = #"gag"
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'right #'padding = #0.6
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'right #'stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'left #'stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER
\override Glissando #'bound-details #'right #'arrow = ##t
\override Glissando #'arrow-length = #0.5
\override Glissando #'arrow-width = #0.25
a8\startTextSpan gis a4 b\glissando b,
g'4 c\stopTextSpan c2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="68/lily-9bd8f91e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="68/lily-9bd8f91e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="modifying-default-values-for-articulation-shorthand-notation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Modifying default values for articulation shorthand notation</h3>
<p>The shorthands are defined in ‘<samp><span class="samp">ly/script-init.ly</span></samp>’, where the
variables <code>dashHat</code>, <code>dashPlus</code>, <code>dashDash</code>,
<code>dashBar</code>, <code>dashLarger</code>, <code>dashDot</code>, and
<code>dashUnderscore</code> are assigned default values. The default values
for the shorthands can be modified. For example, to associate the
<code>-+</code> (<code>dashPlus</code>) shorthand with the trill symbol instead of
the default + symbol, assign the value <code>trill</code> to the variable
<code>dashPlus</code>:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' { c1-+ }
dashPlus = "trill"
\relative c'' { c1-+ }
</pre>
<p>
<a href="64/lily-497603cb.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="64/lily-497603cb.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-centered-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with centered dynamics</h3>
<p>Many piano scores have the dynamics centered between the two staves.
This requires a bit of tweaking to implement, but since the template is
right here, you don't have to do the tweaking yourself.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
dynamics = {
s2\fff\> s4 s\!\pp
}
pedal = {
s2\sustainOn s\sustainOff
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" \upper
\new Dynamics = "dynamics" \dynamics
\new Staff = "lower" <<
\clef bass
\lower
>>
\new Dynamics = "pedal" \pedal
>>
\layout {
\context {
\type "Engraver_group"
\name Dynamics
% So that \cresc works, for example.
\alias Voice
\consists "Output_property_engraver"
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1 . 1)
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'Y-offset = #0
pedalSustainStrings = #'("Ped." "*Ped." "*")
pedalUnaCordaStrings = #'("una corda" "" "tre corde")
\consists "Piano_pedal_engraver"
\consists "Script_engraver"
\consists "Dynamic_engraver"
\consists "Text_engraver"
\override TextScript #'font-size = #2
\override TextScript #'font-shape = #'italic
\consists "Skip_event_swallow_translator"
\consists "Axis_group_engraver"
}
\context {
\PianoStaff
\accepts Dynamics
}
}
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" << \upper \dynamics \pedal >>
\new Staff = "lower" << \lower \dynamics \pedal >>
>>
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="81/lily-165c7953.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="81/lily-165c7953.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-hairpins-using-al-niente-notation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing hairpins using al niente notation</h3>
<p>Hairpins may be printed with a circled tip (al niente notation) by
setting the <code>circled-tip</code> property of the <code>Hairpin</code> object to
<code>#t</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override Hairpin #'circled-tip = ##t
c2\< c\!
c4\> c\< c2\!
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f7/lily-5bf21882.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f7/lily-5bf21882.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-metronome-and-rehearsal-marks-below-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing metronome and rehearsal marks below the staff</h3>
<p>By default, metronome and rehearsal marks are printed above the staff.
To place them below the staff simply set the <code>direction</code> property
of <code>MetronomeMark</code> or <code>RehearsalMark</code> appropriately.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
{
% Metronome marks below the staff
\override Score.MetronomeMark #'direction = #DOWN
\tempo 8. = 120
c''1
% Rehearsal marks below the staff
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'direction = #DOWN
\mark \default
c''1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4a/lily-cfdefdd1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4a/lily-cfdefdd1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="setting-hairpin-behavior-at-bar-lines.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Setting hairpin behavior at bar lines</h3>
<p>If the note which ends a hairpin falls on a downbeat,
the hairpin stops at the bar line immediately preceding. This behavior
can be controlled by overriding the <code>to-barline</code> property.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
e4\< e2.
e1\!
\override Hairpin #'to-barline = ##f
e4\< e2.
e1\!
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b1/lily-0f325864.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b1/lily-0f325864.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="setting-the-minimum-length-of-hairpins.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Setting the minimum length of hairpins</h3>
<p>If hairpins are too short, they can be lengthened by modifying the
<code>minimum-length</code> property of the <code>Hairpin</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
c4\< c\! d\> e\!
\override Hairpin #'minimum-length = #5
<< f1 { s4 s\< s\> s\! } >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="26/lily-05e97732.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="26/lily-05e97732.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="using-double-slurs-for-legato-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Using double slurs for legato chords</h3>
<p>Some composers write two slurs when they want legato chords. This can
be achieved by setting <code>doubleSlurs</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\set doubleSlurs = ##t
<c e>4( <d f> <c e> <d f>)
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="01/lily-f47ba35f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="01/lily-f47ba35f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vertically-aligning-dynamics-across-multiple-notes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vertically aligning dynamics across multiple notes</h3>
<p>Dynamics that occur at, begin on, or end on the same note will be
vertically aligned. To ensure that dynamics are aligned when they do
not occur on the same note, increase the <code>staff-padding</code> property
of the <code>DynamicLineSpanner</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'staff-padding = #4
c2\p f\mf
g2\< b4\> c\!
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="77/lily-2903ec6d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="77/lily-2903ec6d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Repeats"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Repeats</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Repeats">Repeats</a>.
<p><a name="adding-volta-brackets-to-additional-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding volta brackets to additional staves</h3>
<p>The <code>Volta_engraver</code> by default resides in the <code>Score</code>
context, and brackets for the repeat are thus normally only printed
over the topmost staff. This can be adjusted by adding the
<code>Volta_engraver</code> to the <code>Staff</code> context where the brackets
should appear; see also the "Volta multi staff" snippet.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\new Staff { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 } \alternative { c' } }
\new Staff { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 } \alternative { c' } }
\new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } { c'2 g' e' a' }
\new Staff { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 } \alternative { c' } }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d7/lily-983569f3.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d7/lily-983569f3.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="isolated-percent-repeats.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Isolated percent repeats</h3>
<p>Isolated percents can also be printed. This is done by entering a
multi-measure rest with a different print function:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override MultiMeasureRest #'stencil
= #ly:multi-measure-rest::percent
R1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="7e/lily-ddfcefb7.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="7e/lily-ddfcefb7.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="measure-counter.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Measure counter</h3>
<p>This snippet provides a workaround for emitting measure counters using
transparent percent repeats.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\context Voice = "foo" {
\clef bass
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
}
\context Voice = "foo" {
\set countPercentRepeats = ##t
\override PercentRepeat #'transparent = ##t
\override PercentRepeatCounter #'staff-padding = #1
\repeat percent 4 { s1 }
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a1/lily-804e41ff.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a1/lily-804e41ff.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="percent-repeat-counter.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Percent repeat counter</h3>
<p>Measure repeats of more than two repeats can get a counter when the
convenient property is switched, as shown in this example:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\set countPercentRepeats = ##t
\repeat percent 4 { c1 }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e2/lily-98b0e9d3.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e2/lily-98b0e9d3.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="positioning-segno-and-coda-with-line-break.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Positioning segno and coda (with line break)</h3>
<p>If you want to place an exiting segno sign and add text like "D.S. al
Coda" next to it where usually the staff lines are you can use this
snippet. The coda will resume in a new line. There is a variation
documented in this snippet, where the coda will remain on the same
line.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\clef treble
\key g \major
\time 4/4
\relative c'' {
\repeat unfold 2 {
| c4 c c c
}
% Set segno sign as rehearsal mark and adjust size if needed
% \once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'font-size = #3
\mark \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.segno" }
\repeat unfold 2 {
| c4 c c c
}
% Set coda sign as rehearsal mark and adjust size if needed
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'font-size = #4
\mark \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.coda" }
\repeat unfold 2 {
| c4 c c c
}
% Should Coda be on anew line?
% Coda NOT on new line: use \nobreak
% Coda on new line: DON'T use \nobreak
% \noBreak
\bar "||"
% Set segno sign as rehearsal mark and adjust size if needed
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
% \once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'font-size = #3
\mark \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.segno" }
% Here begins the trickery!
% \cadenzaOn will suppress the bar count and \stopStaff removes the staff lines.
\cadenzaOn
\stopStaff
% Some examples of possible text-displays
% text line-aligned
% ==================
% Move text to the desired position
% \once \override TextScript #'extra-offset = #'( 2 . -3.5 )
% | s1*0^\markup { D.S. al Coda } }
% text center-aligned
% ====================
% Move text to the desired position
% \once \override TextScript #'extra-offset = #'( 6 . -5.0 )
% | s1*0^\markup { \center-column { D.S. "al Coda" } }
% text and symbols center-aligned
% ===============================
% Move text to the desired position and tweak spacing for optimum text alignment
%\once \override TextScript #'extra-offset = #'( 8 . -5.5 )
\once \override TextScript #'word-space = #1.5
\once \override TextScript #'X-offset = #8
\once \override TextScript #'Y-offset = #1.5
| s1*0^\markup { \center-column { "D.S. al Coda" \line { \musicglyph #"scripts.coda" \musicglyph #"scripts.tenuto" \musicglyph #"scripts.coda"} } }
% Increasing the unfold counter will expand the staff-free space
\repeat unfold 4 {
s4 s4 s4 s4
\bar ""
}
% Resume bar count and show staff lines again
\startStaff
\cadenzaOff
% Should Coda be on new line?
% Coda NOT on new line: DON'T use \break
% Coda on new line: use \break
\break
% Show up, you clef and key!
\once \override Staff.KeySignature #'break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible
\once \override Staff.Clef #'break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible
% Set coda sign as rehearsal mark and adjust size and position
% Put the coda sign ontop of the (treble-)clef dependend on coda's line-position
% Coda NOT on new line, use this:
% \once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'extra-offset = #'( -2 . 1.75 )
% Coda on new line, use this:
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'extra-offset = #'( -8.42 . 1.75 )
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'font-size = #5
\mark \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.coda" }
% The coda
\repeat unfold 5 {
| c4 c c c
}
\bar"|."
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="69/lily-bfc347e7.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="69/lily-bfc347e7.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-a-repeat-sign-at-the-beginning-of-a-piece.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing a repeat sign at the beginning of a piece</h3>
<p>A <code>|:</code> bar line can be printed at the beginning of a piece, by
overriding the relevant property:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\once \override Score.BreakAlignment #'break-align-orders =
#(make-vector 3 '(instrument-name
left-edge
ambitus
span-bar
breathing-sign
clef
key-signature
time-signature
staff-bar
custos
span-bar))
\bar "|:"
c1
d1
d4 e f g
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f9/lily-8304a96e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f9/lily-8304a96e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="shortening-volta-brackets.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Shortening volta brackets</h3>
<p>By default, the volta brackets will be drawn over all of the
alternative music, but it is possible to shorten them by setting
<code>voltaSpannerDuration</code>. In the next example, the bracket only
lasts one measure, which is a duration of 3/4.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\time 3/4
c4 c c
\set Score.voltaSpannerDuration = #(ly:make-moment 3 4)
\repeat volta 5 { d4 d d }
\alternative {
{
e4 e e
f4 f f
}
{ g4 g g }
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="50/lily-33a976e8.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="50/lily-33a976e8.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="volta-below-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Volta under chords</h3>
<p>By adding the <code>Volta_engraver</code> to the relevant
staff, volte can be put under chords.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
<<
\chords {
c1
c1
}
\new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } {
\repeat volta 2 { c'1 }
\alternative { c' }
}
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Volta_engraver"
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="22/lily-5adaa60e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="22/lily-5adaa60e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="volta-multi-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Volta multi-staff</h3>
<p>By adding the <code>Volta_engraver</code> to the relevant
staff, volte can be put over staves other than the topmost
one in a score.
<pre class="verbatim">
voltaMusic = \relative c'' {
\repeat volta 2 {
c1
}
\alternative {
d1
e
}
}
<<
\new StaffGroup <<
\context Staff \voltaMusic
\new Staff \voltaMusic
>>
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" }
\voltaMusic
\new Staff \voltaMusic
>>
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="63/lily-2dcbf660.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="63/lily-2dcbf660.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="volta-text-markup-using-repeatcommands.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Volta text markup using <code>repeatCommands</code></h3>
<p>Though volte are best specified using
<code>\repeat volta</code>, the context property <code>repeatCommands</code>
must be used in cases where the volta text needs more advanced
formatting with <code>\markup</code>.
<p>Since <code>repeatCommands</code> takes a list, the simplest method of
including markup is to use an identifier for the text and embed
it in the command list using the Scheme syntax
<code>#(list (list 'volta textIdentifier))</code><!-- /@w -->. Start- and end-repeat commands
can be added as separate list elements:
<pre class="verbatim">
voltaAdLib = \markup { 1. 2. 3... \text \italic { ad lib. } }
\relative c'' {
c1
\set Score.repeatCommands = #(list (list 'volta voltaAdLib) 'start-repeat)
c4 b d e
\set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f) (volta "4.") end-repeat)
f1
\set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f))
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="51/lily-aa967734.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="51/lily-aa967734.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Simultaneous-notes"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Simultaneous notes</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Simultaneous-notes">Simultaneous notes</a>.
<p><a name="additional-voices-to-avoid-collisions.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Additional voices to avoid collisions</h3>
<p>In some instances of complex polyphonic music, additional voices are
necessary to prevent collisions between notes. If more than four
parallel voices are needed, additional voices can be added by defining
a variable using the Scheme function <code>context-spec-music</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
voiceFive = #(context-spec-music (make-voice-props-set 4) 'Voice)
\relative c'' {
\time 3/4 \key d \minor \partial 2
<<
{ \voiceOne
a4. a8
e'4 e4. e8
f4 d4. c8
} \\ {
\voiceThree
f,2
bes4 a2
a4 s2
} \\ {
\voiceFive
s2
g4 g2
f4 f2
} \\ {
\voiceTwo
d2
d4 cis2
d4 bes2
}
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c9/lily-6be42b3d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c9/lily-6be42b3d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-a-single-notes-size-in-a-chord.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing a single note's size in a chord</h3>
<p>Individual note heads in a chord can be modified with the
<code>\tweak</code> command inside a chord, by altering the <code>font-size</code>
property.
<p>Inside the chord (within the brackets <code>< ></code>), before the note to
be altered, place the <code>\tweak</code> command, followed by
<code>#'font-size</code> and define the proper size like <code>#-2</code> (a tiny
notehead).
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
\relative {
<\tweak #'font-size #+2 c e g c \tweak #'font-size #-2 e>1^\markup { A tiny e }_\markup { A big c }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="69/lily-7e4a3f0d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="69/lily-7e4a3f0d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-partcombine-texts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing partcombine texts</h3>
<p>When using the automatic part combining feature, the printed text for
the solo and unison sections may be changed:
<pre class="verbatim">
\new Staff <<
\set Staff.soloText = #"girl"
\set Staff.soloIIText = #"boy"
\set Staff.aDueText = #"together"
\partcombine
\relative c'' {
g4 g r r
a2 g
}
\relative c'' {
r4 r a( b)
a2 g
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f7/lily-895dc057.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f7/lily-895dc057.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="clusters.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Clusters</h3>
<p>Clusters are a device to denote that a complete range of notes is to be
played.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
ragged-right = ##t
}
fragment = \relative c' {
c4 f <e d'>4
<g a>8 <e a> a4 c2 <d b>4
e2 c
}
<<
\new Staff \fragment
\new Staff \makeClusters \fragment
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="67/lily-7b23dbb9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="67/lily-7b23dbb9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="combining-two-parts-on-the-same-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Combining two parts on the same staff</h3>
<p>The part combiner tool ( <code>\partcombine</code> command ) allows the
combination of several different parts on the same staff. Text
directions such as "solo" or "a2" are added by default; to remove
them, simply set the property <code>printPartCombineTexts</code> to
"false". For vocal scores (hymns), there is no need to add
"solo"/"a2" texts, so they should be switched off. However, it
might be better not to use it if there are any solos, as they won't be
indicated. In such cases, standard polyphonic notation may be
preferable.
<p>This snippet presents the three ways two parts can be printed on a same
staff: standard polyphony, <code>\partcombine</code> without texts, and
<code>\partcombine</code> with texts.
<pre class="verbatim">
musicUp = \relative c'' {
\time 4/4
a4 c4.( g8) a4 |
g4 e' g,( a8 b) |
c b a2.
}
musicDown = \relative c'' {
g4 e4.( d8) c4 |
r2 g'4( f8 e) |
d2 \stemDown a
}
\score {
<<
<<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Standard polyphony "
<< \musicUp \\ \musicDown >>
}
\new Staff \with { printPartCombineTexts = ##f } {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "PartCombine without texts "
\partcombine \musicUp \musicDown
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "PartCombine with texts "
\partcombine \musicUp \musicDown
}
>>
>>
\layout {
indent = 6.0\cm
\context {
\Score
\override SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #30
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="5e/lily-c79da8a0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="5e/lily-c79da8a0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="forcing-horizontal-shift-of-notes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Forcing horizontal shift of notes</h3>
<p>When the typesetting engine cannot cope, the <code>force-hshift</code>
property of the <code>NoteColumn</code> object can be used to override
typesetting decisions. The measure units used here are staff spaces.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' <<
{
<d g>2 <d g>
}
\\
{ <b f'>2
\once \override NoteColumn #'force-hshift = #1.7
<b f'>2
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="1b/lily-041be501.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="1b/lily-041be501.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="suppressing-warnings-for-clashing-note-columns.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Suppressing warnings for clashing note columns</h3>
<p>If notes from two voices with stems in the same direction are
placed at the same position, and both voices have no shift or the
same shift specified, the error message "warning: ignoring too
many clashing note columns" will appear when compiling the
LilyPond file. This message can be suppressed by setting the
<code>'ignore-collision</code> property of the <code>NoteColumn</code> object
to <code>#t</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
ignore = \override NoteColumn #'ignore-collision = ##t
\relative c' <<
\ignore
{ \stemDown f2 g } \\
{ c2 c, }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="28/lily-74c9287c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="28/lily-74c9287c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Staff-notation"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Staff notation</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Staff-notation">Staff notation</a>.
<p><a name="adding-ambitus-per-voice.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding ambitus per voice</h3>
<p>Ambitus can be added per voice. In this case, the ambitus must be moved
manually to prevent collisions.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new Staff <<
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
} \relative c'' {
\override Ambitus #'X-offset = #2.0
\voiceOne
c4 a d e
f1
}
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
} \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
es4 f g as
b1
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4f/lily-6712adbe.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4f/lily-6712adbe.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adding-an-extra-staff-at-a-line-break.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding an extra staff at a line break</h3>
<p>When adding a new staff at a line break, some extra space is
unfortunately added at the end of the line before the break (to fit in
a key signature change, which will never be printed anyway). The
workaround is to add a setting of
<code>Staff.explicitKeySignatureVisibility</code> as is shown in the example.
In versions 2.10 and earlier, a similar setting for the time signatures
is also required (see the example).
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
\new Staff
\key f \major
c1 c^"Unwanted extra space" \break
<< { c1 c }
\new Staff {
\key f \major
\once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
c1 c
}
>>
c1 c^"Fixed here" \break
<< { c1 c }
\new Staff {
\once \set Staff.explicitKeySignatureVisibility = #end-of-line-invisible
% The next line is not needed in 2.11.x or later:
\once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible
\key f \major
\once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
c1 c
}
>>
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="84/lily-0b4b70af.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="84/lily-0b4b70af.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adding-an-extra-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding an extra staff</h3>
<p>An extra staff can be added (possibly temporarily) after the start of a
piece.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
<<
\new Staff \relative c'' { c1 c c c c }
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
\new Staff {
c1 c
<< c1 \new Staff { \once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f c1 } >>
c
}
}
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="47/lily-264ca3ec.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="47/lily-264ca3ec.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-number-of-lines-in-a-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the number of lines in a staff</h3>
<p>The number of lines in a staff may changed by overriding the
<code>StaffSymbol</code> property <code>line-count</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
c4 d e f
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
c4 b a g
}
\score {
\context PianoStaff <<
\new Staff {
\upper
}
\new Staff {
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-count = #4
\lower
}
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="6b/lily-a8184fca.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="6b/lily-a8184fca.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-staff-size.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the staff size</h3>
<p>Though the simplest way to resize staves is to use
<code>#(set-global-staff-size xx)</code>, an individual staff's size can be
changed by scaling the properties <code>staff-space</code> and
<code>fontSize</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\new Staff \relative c'' {
\dynamicDown
c8\ff c c c c c c c
}
\new Staff \with {
fontSize = #-3
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -3)
} {
\clef bass
c8 c c c c\f c c c
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="33/lily-eb10503d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="33/lily-eb10503d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-blank-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating blank staves</h3>
<p>To create blank staves, generate empty measures then remove the
<code>Bar_number_engraver</code> from the <code>Score</code> context, and the
<code>Time_signature_engraver</code>, <code>Clef_engraver</code> and
<code>Bar_engraver</code> from the <code>Staff</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-global-staff-size 20)
\score {
{
\repeat unfold 12 { s1 \break }
}
\layout {
indent = 0\in
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Clef_engraver"
\remove "Bar_engraver"
}
\context {
\Score
\remove "Bar_number_engraver"
}
}
}
\paper {
#(set-paper-size "letter")
ragged-last-bottom = ##f
line-width = 7.5\in
left-margin = 0.5\in
bottom-margin = 0.25\in
top-margin = 0.25\in
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="63/lily-e0186df5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="63/lily-e0186df5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="display-bracket-with-only-one-staff-in-a-system.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Display bracket with only one staff in a system</h3>
<p>If there is only one staff in one of the staff types
<code>ChoirStaff</code>, <code>InnerChoirStaff</code>, <code>InnerStaffGroup</code>
or <code>StaffGroup</code>, the bracket and the starting bar line will not
be displayed as standard behavior. This can be changed by overriding
the relevant properties, as demonstrated in this example.
<p>Note that in contexts such as <code>PianoStaff</code> and <code>GrandStaff</code>
where the systems begin with a brace instead of a bracket, another
property has to be set, as shown on the second system in the example.
<pre class="verbatim">
\markup \column {
\score {
\new StaffGroup <<
% Must be lower than the actual number of staff lines
\override StaffGroup.SystemStartBracket #'collapse-height = #1
\override Score.SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #1
\new Staff {
c'1
}
>>
\layout { }
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\override PianoStaff.SystemStartBrace #'collapse-height = #1
\override Score.SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #1
\new Staff {
c'1
}
>>
\layout { }
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="60/lily-892f5d56.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="60/lily-892f5d56.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="incipit.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Incipit</h3>
<p>Incipits can be added using the instrument name grob, but
keeping separate the instrument name definition and the incipit definition.
<pre class="verbatim">
incipit =
#(define-music-function (parser location incipit-music) (ly:music?)
#{
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'self-alignment-X = #RIGHT
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'self-alignment-Y = #UP
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'Y-offset = #4
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'padding = #0.3
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'stencil =
#(lambda (grob)
(let* ((instrument-name (ly:grob-property grob 'long-text))
(layout (ly:output-def-clone (ly:grob-layout grob)))
(music (make-music 'SequentialMusic
'elements (list (make-music 'ContextSpeccedMusic
'context-type 'MensuralStaff
'element (make-music 'PropertySet
'symbol 'instrumentName
'value instrument-name))
$incipit-music)))
(score (ly:make-score music))
(mm (ly:output-def-lookup layout 'mm))
(indent (ly:output-def-lookup layout 'indent))
(width (ly:output-def-lookup layout 'incipit-width))
(incipit-width (if (number? width)
(* width mm)
(* indent 0.5))))
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'indent (- indent incipit-width))
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'line-width indent)
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'ragged-right #f)
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'ragged-last #f)
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'system-count 1)
(ly:score-add-output-def! score layout)
(set! (ly:grob-property grob 'long-text)
(markup #:score score))
(ly:system-start-text::print grob)))
#})
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
global = {
\set Score.skipBars = ##t
\key g \major
\time 4/4
%make the staff lines invisible on staves
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##t
% the actual music
\skip 1*8
% let finis bar go through all staves
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##f
% finis bar
\bar "|."
}
discantusIncipit = <<
\new MensuralVoice = discantusIncipit <<
\repeat unfold 9 { s1 \noBreak }
{
\clef "neomensural-c1"
\key f \major
\time 2/2
c''1.
}
>>
\new Lyrics \lyricsto discantusIncipit { IV- }
>>
discantusNotes = {
\transpose c' c'' {
\clef "treble"
d'2. d'4 |
b e' d'2 |
c'4 e'4.( d'8 c' b |
a4) b a2 |
b4.( c'8 d'4) c'4 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
c'1 |
b\breve |
}
}
discantusLyrics = \lyricmode {
Ju -- bi -- |
la -- te De -- |
o, om --
nis ter -- |
ra, __ om- |
"..." |
-us. |
}
altusIncipit = <<
\new MensuralVoice = altusIncipit <<
\repeat unfold 9 { s1 \noBreak }
{
\clef "neomensural-c3"
\key f \major
\time 2/2
r1 f'1.
}
>>
\new Lyrics \lyricsto altusIncipit { IV- }
>>
altusNotes = {
\transpose c' c'' {
\clef "treble"
% two measures
r2 g2. e4 fis g |
a2 g4 e |
fis g4.( fis16 e fis4) |
g1 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
g1 |
g\breve |
}
}
altusLyrics = \lyricmode {
% two measures
Ju -- bi -- la -- te |
De -- o, om -- |
nis ter -- ra, |
"..." |
-us. |
}
tenorIncipit = <<
\new MensuralVoice = tenorIncipit <<
\repeat unfold 9 { s1 \noBreak }
{
\clef "neomensural-c4"
\key f \major
\time 2/2
r\longa
r\breve
r1 c'1.
}
>>
\new Lyrics \lyricsto tenorIncipit { IV- }
>>
tenorNotes = {
\transpose c' c' {
\once \override Staff.VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-6 . 3)
\clef "treble_8"
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
% two measures
r2 d'2. d'4 b e' |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
e'1 |
d'\breve |
}
}
tenorLyrics = \lyricmode {
% two measures
Ju -- bi -- la -- te |
"..." |
-us.
}
bassusIncipit = <<
\new MensuralVoice = bassusIncipit <<
\repeat unfold 9 { s1 \noBreak }
{
\clef "bass"
\key f \major
\time 2/2
%% incipit
r\maxima
f1.
}
>>
\new Lyrics \lyricsto bassusIncipit { IV- }
>>
bassusNotes = {
\transpose c' c' {
\clef "bass"
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
g2. e4 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
e1 |
g\breve |
}
}
bassusLyrics = \lyricmode {
Ju -- bi- |
"..." |
-us.
}
\score {
<<
\new StaffGroup = choirStaff <<
\new Voice = "discantusNotes" <<
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Discantus"
\incipit \discantusIncipit
\discantusNotes
>>
\new Lyrics = "discantusLyrics" \lyricsto discantusNotes { \discantusLyrics }
\new Voice = "altusNotes" <<
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Altus"
\incipit \altusIncipit
\altusNotes
>>
\new Lyrics = "altusLyrics" \lyricsto altusNotes { \altusLyrics }
\new Voice = "tenorNotes" <<
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Tenor"
\incipit \tenorIncipit
\tenorNotes
>>
\new Lyrics = "tenorLyrics" \lyricsto tenorNotes { \tenorLyrics }
\new Voice = "bassusNotes" <<
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Bassus"
\incipit \bassusIncipit
\bassusNotes
>>
>>
\new Lyrics = "bassusLyrics" \lyricsto bassusNotes { \bassusLyrics }
%% Keep the bass lyrics outside of the staff group to avoid bar lines
%% between the lyrics.
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
%% no bar lines in staves
\override BarLine #'transparent = ##t
}
%% the next three instructions keep the lyrics between the bar lines
\context {
\Lyrics
\consists "Bar_engraver"
\override BarLine #'transparent = ##t
}
\context {
\StaffGroup
\consists "Separating_line_group_engraver"
}
\context {
\Voice
%% no slurs
\override Slur #'transparent = ##t
%% Comment in the below "\remove" command to allow line
%% breaking also at those bar lines where a note overlaps
%% into the next measure. The command is commented out in this
%% short example score, but especially for large scores, you
%% will typically yield better line breaking and thus improve
%% overall spacing if you comment in the following command.
%%\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
}
indent=6\cm
incipit-width = 4\cm
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="67/lily-f7349074.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="67/lily-f7349074.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="inserting-score-fragments-above-a-staff,-as-markups.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Inserting score fragments above a staff, as markups</h3>
<p>The <code>\markup</code> command is quite versatile. In this snippet, it
contains a <code>\score</code> block instead of texts or marks.
<pre class="verbatim">
tuning = \markup {
\score {
\new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" }
{
\clef bass <c, g, d g>1
}
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
}
}
\header {
title = "Solo Cello Suites"
subtitle = "Suite IV"
subsubtitle = \markup { Originalstimmung: \general-align #Y #CENTER \tuning }
}
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c'' {
\time 4/8
\times 2/3 { c8 d e } \times 2/3 { c d e }
\times 2/3 { c8 d e } \times 2/3 { c d e }
g8 a g a
g8 a g a
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d5/lily-3acedfa0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d5/lily-3acedfa0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="letter-tablature-formatting.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Letter tablature formatting</h3>
<p>Tablature can be formatted using letters instead of
numbers.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define (letter-tablature-format str context event)
(let*
((tuning (ly:context-property context 'stringTunings))
(pitch (ly:event-property event 'pitch)))
(make-whiteout-markup
(make-vcenter-markup
(string (integer->char
(+ (char->integer #\a)
(- (ly:pitch-semitones pitch)
(list-ref tuning (- str 1))))))))))
music = \relative c {
c4 d e f
g4 a b c
d4 e f g
}
<<
\new Staff {
\clef "G_8"
\music
}
\new TabStaff \with {
tablatureFormat = #letter-tablature-format
} {
\music
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="06/lily-8b6a0e98.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="06/lily-8b6a0e98.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="making-some-staff-lines-thicker-than-the-others.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Making some staff lines thicker than the others</h3>
<p>For pedagogical purposes, a staff line can be thickened (e.g., the
middle line, or to emphasize the line of the G clef). This can be
achieved by adding extra lines very close to the line that should be
emphasized, using the <code>line-positions</code> property of the
<code>StaffSymbol</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'(-4 -2 -0.2 0 0.2 2 4)
d'4 e' f' g'
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="88/lily-f408db2d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="88/lily-f408db2d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="measure-counter.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Measure counter</h3>
<p>This snippet provides a workaround for emitting measure counters using
transparent percent repeats.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\context Voice = "foo" {
\clef bass
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
}
\context Voice = "foo" {
\set countPercentRepeats = ##t
\override PercentRepeat #'transparent = ##t
\override PercentRepeatCounter #'staff-padding = #1
\repeat percent 4 { s1 }
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a1/lily-804e41ff.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a1/lily-804e41ff.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="mensurstriche-layout-bar-lines-between-the-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Mensurstriche layout (bar lines between the staves)</h3>
<p>The mensurstriche-layout where the bar lines do not show on the staves
but between staves can be achieved with a <code>StaffGroup</code> instead of
a <code>ChoirStaff</code>. The bar line on staves is blanked out by setting
the <code>transparent</code> property.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##t
s1 s
% the final bar line is not interrupted
\revert Staff.BarLine #'transparent
\bar "|."
}
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
<<
\new Staff { << \global { c1 c } >> }
\new Staff { << \global { c c } >> }
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d4/lily-0139e5aa.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d4/lily-0139e5aa.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="modern-tab-text-clef.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Modern TAB text clef</h3>
<p>Use a markup text to replace the (TAB) clef glyph with a modern font.
<pre class="verbatim">
TAB = \markup {
\raise #1.5
\sans
\bold
\huge
\override #'(baseline-skip . 2.5)
\center-column {
T
A
B
}
}
\new TabStaff {
\override Staff.Clef #'stencil = #(lambda (grob)
ly:clef::print (grob-interpret-markup grob TAB))
a
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d9/lily-7ff0d7c4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d9/lily-7ff0d7c4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="nesting-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Nesting staves</h3>
<p>The property <code>systemStartDelimiterHierarchy</code> can be used to make
more complex nested staff groups. The command <code>\set
StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy</code> takes an alphabetical list of
the number of staves produced. Before each staff a system start
delimiter can be given. It has to be enclosed in brackets and takes as
much staves as the brackets enclose. Elements in the list can be
omitted, but the first bracket takes always the complete number of
staves. The possibilities are <code>SystemStartBar</code>,
<code>SystemStartBracket</code>, <code>SystemStartBrace</code>, and
<code>SystemStartSquare</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new StaffGroup
\relative c'' <<
\set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy
= #'(SystemStartSquare (SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a
(SystemStartSquare b) ) c ) d)
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c2/lily-70d9e59c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c2/lily-70d9e59c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="non-traditional-key-signatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Non-traditional key signatures</h3>
<p>The commonly used <code>\key</code> command sets the <code>keySignature</code>
property, in the <code>Staff</code> context.
<p>To create non-standard key signatures, set this property directly. The
format of this command is a list:
<p><code> \set Staff.keySignature = #`(((octave . step) . alter) ((octave
. step) . alter) ...) </code> where, for each element in the list,
<code>octave</code> specifies the octave (0 being the octave from middle C to
the B above), <code>step</code> specifies the note within the octave (0 means
C and 6 means B), and <code>alter</code> is <code>,SHARP ,FLAT ,DOUBLE-SHARP</code>
etc. (Note the leading comma.)
<p>Alternatively, for each item in the list, using the more concise format
<code>(step . alter)</code> specifies that the same alteration should hold in
all octaves.
<p>Here is an example of a possible key signature for generating a
whole-tone scale:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\set Staff.keySignature = #`(((0 . 3) . ,SHARP) ((0 . 5) . ,FLAT) ((0 . 6) . ,FLAT))
c4 d e fis
aes4 bes c2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="02/lily-2e1932b1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="02/lily-2e1932b1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-metronome-and-rehearsal-marks-below-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing metronome and rehearsal marks below the staff</h3>
<p>By default, metronome and rehearsal marks are printed above the staff.
To place them below the staff simply set the <code>direction</code> property
of <code>MetronomeMark</code> or <code>RehearsalMark</code> appropriately.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
{
% Metronome marks below the staff
\override Score.MetronomeMark #'direction = #DOWN
\tempo 8. = 120
c''1
% Rehearsal marks below the staff
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'direction = #DOWN
\mark \default
c''1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4a/lily-cfdefdd1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4a/lily-cfdefdd1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="quoting-another-voice-with-transposition.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Quoting another voice with transposition</h3>
<p>Quotations take into account the transposition of both
source and target. In this example, all instruments play sounding
middle C; the target is an instrument in F. The target part may be
transposed using <code>\transpose</code>. In this case, all the pitches
(including the quoted ones) are transposed.
<pre class="verbatim">
\addQuote clarinet {
\transposition bes
\repeat unfold 8 { d'16 d' d'8 }
}
\addQuote sax {
\transposition es'
\repeat unfold 16 { a8 }
}
quoteTest = {
% french horn
\transposition f
g'4
<< \quoteDuring #"clarinet" { \skip 4 } s4^"clar." >>
<< \quoteDuring #"sax" { \skip 4 } s4^"sax." >>
g'4
}
{
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup \center-column { Horn \line { in F } }
\quoteTest
\transpose c' d' << \quoteTest s4_"up a tone" >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9f/lily-2747fcc3.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9f/lily-2747fcc3.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="quoting-another-voice.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Quoting another voice</h3>
<p>With <code>\quote</code>, fragments of previously entered
music may be quoted. <code>quotedEventTypes</code> will determines which
items are quoted. In this example, a 16th rest is not quoted, since
<code>rest-event</code> is not in <code>quotedEventTypes</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
quoteMe = \relative c' { fis4 r16 a8.-> b4-\ff c }
\addQuote quoteMe \quoteMe
original = \relative c'' {
c8 d s2
\once \override NoteColumn #'ignore-collision = ##t
es8 gis8
}
<<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"quoteMe"
\quoteMe
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"orig"
\original
}
\new Staff \relative c'' <<
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"orig+quote"
\set Staff.quotedEventTypes = #'(note-event articulation-event)
\original
\new Voice {
s4
\set fontSize = #-4
\override Stem #'length-fraction = #(magstep -4)
\quoteDuring #"quoteMe" { \skip 2. }
}
>>
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="5b/lily-e1299e79.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="5b/lily-e1299e79.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="removing-the-first-empty-line.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Removing the first empty line</h3>
<p>The first empty staff can also be removed from the score by setting the
<code>VerticalAxisGroup</code> property <code>remove-first</code>. This can be done
globally inside the <code>\layout</code> block, or locally inside the
specific staff that should be removed. In the latter case, you have to
specify the context (<code>Staff</code> applies only to the current staff) in
front of the property.
<p>The lower staff of the second staff group is not removed, because the
setting applies only to the specific staff inside of which it is
written.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
\context {
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext
% To use the setting globally, uncomment the following line:
% \override VerticalAxisGroup #'remove-first = ##t
}
}
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \relative c' {
e4 f g a \break
c1
}
\new Staff {
% To use the setting globally, comment this line,
% uncomment the line in the \layout block above
\override Staff.VerticalAxisGroup #'remove-first = ##t
R1 \break
R
}
>>
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \relative c' {
e4 f g a \break
c1
}
\new Staff {
R1 \break
R
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e7/lily-3d411fb4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e7/lily-3d411fb4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="time-signature-in-parentheses.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Time signature in parentheses</h3>
<p>The time signature can be enclosed within parentheses.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = #(lambda (grob)
(bracketify-stencil (ly:time-signature::print grob) Y 0.1 0.2 0.1))
\time 2/4
a4 b8 c
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-bb42503d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-bb42503d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="tweaking-clef-properties.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Tweaking clef properties</h3>
<p>The command <code>\clef "treble_8"</code> is equivalent to setting
<code>clefGlyph</code>, <code>clefPosition</code> (which controls the vertical
position of the clef), <code>middleCPosition</code> and
<code>clefOctavation</code>. A clef is printed when any of the properties
except <code>middleCPosition</code> are changed.
<p>Note that changing the glyph, the position of the clef, or the
octavation does not in itself change the position of subsequent notes
on the staff: the position of middle C must also be specified to do
this. The positional parameters are relative to the staff center line,
positive numbers displacing upwards, counting one for each line and
space. The <code>clefOctavation</code> value would normally be set to 7, -7,
15 or -15, but other values are valid.
<p>When a clef change takes place at a line break the new clef symbol is
printed at both the end of the previous line and the beginning of the
new line by default. If the warning clef at the end of the previous
line is not required it can be suppressed by setting the <code>Staff</code>
property <code>explicitClefVisibility</code> to the value
<code>end-of-line-invisible</code>. The default behavior can be recovered
with <code>\unset Staff.explicitClefVisibility</code>.
<p>The following examples show the possibilities when setting these
properties manually. On the first line, the manual changes preserve the
standard relative positioning of clefs and notes, whereas on the second
line, they do not.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
% The default treble clef
c'1
% The standard bass clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.F"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #2
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #6
c'1
% The baritone clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.C"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #4
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #4
c'1
% The standard choral tenor clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.G"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #-2
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #-7
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #1
c'1
% A non-standard clef
\set Staff.clefPosition = #0
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #0
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-4
c'1 \break
% The following clef changes do not preserve
% the normal relationship between notes and clefs:
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.F"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #2
c'1
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.G"
c'1
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.C"
c'1
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #7
c'1
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #0
\set Staff.clefPosition = #0
c'1
% Here we go back to the normal clef:
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #0
c'1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="60/lily-919dc097.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="60/lily-919dc097.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="use-square-bracket-at-the-start-of-a-staff-group.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Use square bracket at the start of a staff group</h3>
<p>The system start delimiter <code>SystemStartSquare</code> can be used by
setting it explicitly in a <code>StaffGroup</code> or <code>ChoirStaffGroup</code>
context.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new StaffGroup { <<
\set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiter = #'SystemStartSquare
\new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' }
\new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' }
>> }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="6a/lily-bc90db5c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="6a/lily-bc90db5c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="volta-below-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Volta under chords</h3>
<p>By adding the <code>Volta_engraver</code> to the relevant
staff, volte can be put under chords.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
<<
\chords {
c1
c1
}
\new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } {
\repeat volta 2 { c'1 }
\alternative { c' }
}
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Volta_engraver"
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="22/lily-5adaa60e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="22/lily-5adaa60e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="volta-multi-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Volta multi-staff</h3>
<p>By adding the <code>Volta_engraver</code> to the relevant
staff, volte can be put over staves other than the topmost
one in a score.
<pre class="verbatim">
voltaMusic = \relative c'' {
\repeat volta 2 {
c1
}
\alternative {
d1
e
}
}
<<
\new StaffGroup <<
\context Staff \voltaMusic
\new Staff \voltaMusic
>>
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" }
\voltaMusic
\new Staff \voltaMusic
>>
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="63/lily-2dcbf660.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="63/lily-2dcbf660.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Editorial-annotations"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Editorial annotations</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Editorial-annotations">Editorial annotations</a>.
<p><a name="adding-fingerings-to-a-score.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding fingerings to a score</h3>
<p>Fingering instructions can be entered using a simple syntax.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
c4-1 d-2 f-4 e-3
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c8/lily-da20b121.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c8/lily-da20b121.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="allowing-fingerings-to-be-printed-inside-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Allowing fingerings to be printed inside the staff</h3>
<p>By default, fingering numbers will be printed outside the staff.
However, this behavior can be canceled.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
\once \override Fingering #'staff-padding = #'()
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="51/lily-3f70c2ad.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="51/lily-3f70c2ad.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="analysis-brackets-above-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Analysis brackets above the staff</h3>
<p>Simple horizontal analysis brackets are added below the staff by
default. The following example shows a way to place them above the
staff instead.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
\context {
\Voice
\consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver"
}
}
\relative c'' {
\once \override HorizontalBracket #'direction = #UP
c2\startGroup
d\stopGroup
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="17/lily-b04ac6ea.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="17/lily-b04ac6ea.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="applying-note-head-styles-depending-on-the-step-of-the-scale.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Applying note head styles depending on the step of the scale</h3>
<p>The <code>shapeNoteStyles</code> property can be used to define various note
head styles for each step of the scale (as set by the key signature or
the "tonic" property). This property requires a set of symbols, which
can be purely arbitrary (geometrical expressions such as
<code>triangle</code>, <code>cross</code>, and <code>xcircle</code> are allowed) or based
on old American engraving tradition (some latin note names are also
allowed).
<p>That said, to imitate old American song books, there are several
predefined note head styles available through shortcut commands such as
<code>\aikenHeads</code> or <code>\sacredHarpHeads</code>.
<p>This example shows different ways to obtain shape note heads, and
demonstrates the ability to transpose a melody without losing the
correspondence between harmonic functions and note head styles.
<pre class="verbatim">
fragment = {
\key c \major
c2 d
e2 f
g2 a
b2 c
}
\score {
\new Staff {
\transpose c d
\relative c' {
\set shapeNoteStyles = #'#(do re mi fa #f la ti)
\fragment
}
\relative c' {
\set shapeNoteStyles = #'#(cross triangle fa #f mensural xcircle diamond)
\fragment
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2e/lily-520cfded.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2e/lily-520cfded.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="blanking-staff-lines-using-the--whiteout-command.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command</h3>
<p>The <code>\whiteout</code> command underlays a markup with a white box.
Since staff lines are in a lower layer than most other grobs, this
white box will not overlap any other grob.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c' {
\override TextScript #'extra-offset = #'(2 . 4)
c2-\markup { \whiteout \pad-markup #0.5 "middle C" } c
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="56/lily-e5c94de5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="56/lily-e5c94de5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-a-single-notes-size-in-a-chord.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing a single note's size in a chord</h3>
<p>Individual note heads in a chord can be modified with the
<code>\tweak</code> command inside a chord, by altering the <code>font-size</code>
property.
<p>Inside the chord (within the brackets <code>< ></code>), before the note to
be altered, place the <code>\tweak</code> command, followed by
<code>#'font-size</code> and define the proper size like <code>#-2</code> (a tiny
notehead).
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
\relative {
<\tweak #'font-size #+2 c e g c \tweak #'font-size #-2 e>1^\markup { A tiny e }_\markup { A big c }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="69/lily-7e4a3f0d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="69/lily-7e4a3f0d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-appearance-of-a-slur-from-solid-to-dotted-or-dashed.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the appearance of a slur from solid to dotted or dashed</h3>
<p>The appearance of slurs may be changed from solid to dotted or dashed.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
c4( d e c)
\slurDotted
c4( d e c)
\slurSolid
c4( d e c)
\slurDashed
c4( d e c)
\slurSolid
c4( d e c)
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="7e/lily-91555c1f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="7e/lily-91555c1f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="controlling-the-placement-of-chord-fingerings.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Controlling the placement of chord fingerings</h3>
<p>The placement of fingering numbers can be controlled precisely.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(right)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>2
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up right down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="de/lily-34875599.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="de/lily-34875599.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-blank-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating blank staves</h3>
<p>To create blank staves, generate empty measures then remove the
<code>Bar_number_engraver</code> from the <code>Score</code> context, and the
<code>Time_signature_engraver</code>, <code>Clef_engraver</code> and
<code>Bar_engraver</code> from the <code>Staff</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-global-staff-size 20)
\score {
{
\repeat unfold 12 { s1 \break }
}
\layout {
indent = 0\in
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Clef_engraver"
\remove "Bar_engraver"
}
\context {
\Score
\remove "Bar_number_engraver"
}
}
}
\paper {
#(set-paper-size "letter")
ragged-last-bottom = ##f
line-width = 7.5\in
left-margin = 0.5\in
bottom-margin = 0.25\in
top-margin = 0.25\in
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="63/lily-e0186df5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="63/lily-e0186df5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="default-direction-of-stems-on-the-center-line-of-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Default direction of stems on the center line of the staff</h3>
<p>The default direction of stems on the center line of the staff is set
by the <code>Stem</code> property <code>neutral-direction</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
a4 b c b
\override Stem #'neutral-direction = #up
a4 b c b
\override Stem #'neutral-direction = #down
a4 b c b
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d2/lily-0294ff9f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d2/lily-0294ff9f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="embedding-native-postscript-in-a--markup-block.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block</h3>
<p>PostScript code can be directly inserted inside a <code>\markup</code>
block.
<pre class="verbatim">
% PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
\relative c'' {
a4-\markup { \postscript #"3 4 moveto 5 3 rlineto stroke" }
-\markup { \postscript #"[ 0 1 ] 0 setdash 3 5 moveto 5 -3 rlineto stroke " }
b4-\markup { \postscript #"3 4 moveto 0 0 1 2 8 4 20 3.5 rcurveto stroke" }
s2
a'1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8f/lily-cec3187d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8f/lily-cec3187d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="grid-lines--changing-their-appearance.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Grid lines: changing their appearance</h3>
<p>The appearance of grid lines can be changed by overriding some of their
properties.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
% set up grids
\consists "Grid_point_engraver"
% set the grid interval to one quarter note
gridInterval = #(ly:make-moment 1 4)
}
}
\new Score \with {
\consists "Grid_line_span_engraver"
% this moves them to the right half a staff space
\override NoteColumn #'X-offset = #-0.5
}
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff {
\relative c'' {
\stemUp
c'4. d8 e8 f g4
}
}
\new Staff {
\relative c {
% this moves them up one staff space from the default position
\override Score.GridLine #'extra-offset = #'(0.0 . 1.0)
\stemDown
\clef bass
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #5.0
c4
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #1.0
g'
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #3.0
f
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #5.0
e
}
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="50/lily-fa1785ca.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="50/lily-fa1785ca.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="grid-lines--emphasizing-rhythms-and-notes-synchronization.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization</h3>
<p>Regular vertical lines can be drawn between staves to show notes
synchronization; however, in case of monophonic music, you may want to
make the second stave invisible, and make the lines shorter like in
this snippet.
<pre class="verbatim">
%% sets of grid
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Grid_point_engraver"
gridInterval = #(ly:make-moment 1 8)
%% lines length
\override GridPoint #'Y-extent = #'(6 . 0)
}
\context {
\StaffGroup
\remove "System_start_delimiter_engraver"
}
}
\layout {
ragged-right = ##t
}
\new Score
\with {
\consists "Grid_line_span_engraver"
%% centers grid lines horizontally below noteheads
\override NoteColumn #'X-offset = #-0.5
}
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff
{
\time 12/8
\stemUp
\relative {
c'4. d8 e8 f g4 f8 e8.[ d16 c8] }
}
\new Staff
{
%% making sure the lines will be placed outside the Staff
\override Score.GridLine #'extra-offset = #'( 0.0 . -4.0 )
%% hides staff and notes so that only the grid lines are visible
\override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
\override NoteHead #'no-ledgers = ##t
\override Stem #'transparent = ##t
\override Beam #'transparent = ##t
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##t
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-count = #0
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'transparent = ##t
\override Staff.Clef #'transparent = ##t
% you have to put 'dummy' notes here to force regular grid spacing...
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #4.0
c8 c8 c8
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #3.0
c8 c8 c8
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #4.0
c8 c8 c8
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #3.0
c8 c8 c8
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a6/lily-f2f405c6.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a6/lily-f2f405c6.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="making-some-staff-lines-thicker-than-the-others.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Making some staff lines thicker than the others</h3>
<p>For pedagogical purposes, a staff line can be thickened (e.g., the
middle line, or to emphasize the line of the G clef). This can be
achieved by adding extra lines very close to the line that should be
emphasized, using the <code>line-positions</code> property of the
<code>StaffSymbol</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'(-4 -2 -0.2 0 0.2 2 4)
d'4 e' f' g'
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="88/lily-f408db2d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="88/lily-f408db2d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="measure-counter.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Measure counter</h3>
<p>This snippet provides a workaround for emitting measure counters using
transparent percent repeats.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\context Voice = "foo" {
\clef bass
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
c4 r g r
}
\context Voice = "foo" {
\set countPercentRepeats = ##t
\override PercentRepeat #'transparent = ##t
\override PercentRepeatCounter #'staff-padding = #1
\repeat percent 4 { s1 }
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a1/lily-804e41ff.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a1/lily-804e41ff.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Text"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Text</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Text">Text</a>.
<p><a name="adjusting-lyrics-vertical-spacing.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adjusting lyrics vertical spacing</h3>
<p>This snippet shows how to bring the lyrics line closer to the staff.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Default layout:
<<
\new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' {
c4 d e f
g4 f e d
c1
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa }
% Reducing the minimum space below the staff and above the lyrics:
\new Staff \with {
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1 . 4)
}
\new Voice = melody \relative c' {
c4 d e f
g4 f e d
c1
}
\new Lyrics \with {
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1.2 . 1)
}
\lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="25/lily-be0a47ca.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="25/lily-be0a47ca.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="aligning-and-centering-instrument-names.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Aligning and centering instrument names</h3>
<p>Instrument names are generally printed to the left of the staves. To
align the names of several different intruments, put them in a
<code>\markup</code> block and use one of the following possibilites:
<p>*
Right-aligned instrument names: this is the default behavior
<p>*
Center-aligned instrument names: using the <code>\hcenter-in #n</code>
command
places the instrument names inside a padded box, with <code>n</code> being
the width
of the box
<p>*
Left-aligned instrument names: the names are printed on top of an
empty box, using the <code>\combine</code> command
with an <code>\hspace #n</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
indent = #0
left-margin = #30
line-width = #160
}
\new StaffGroup \relative c' <<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Piccolo"
c1^"default" | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \hcenter-in #10 Piccolo }
c1^"centered" | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \combine \hspace #8 Piccolo }
c1^"left-aligned" | c
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Flute"
c1 | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \hcenter-in #10 Flute }
c1 | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \combine \hspace #8 Flute }
c1 | c
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="58/lily-3fb556c3.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="58/lily-3fb556c3.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="aligning-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Aligning lyrics</h3>
<p>Horizontal alignment for lyrics cam be set by overriding the
<code>self-alignment-X</code> property of the <code>LyricText</code> object.
<code>#-1</code> is left, <code>#0</code> is center and <code>#1</code> is right;
however, you can use <code>#LEFT</code>, <code>#CENTER</code> and <code>#RIGHT</code> as
well.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c'' {
c1
c1
c1
}
\addlyrics {
\once \override LyricText #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
"This is left-aligned"
\once \override LyricText #'self-alignment-X = #CENTER
"This is centered"
\once \override LyricText #'self-alignment-X = #1
"This is right-aligned"
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e5/lily-dfa6ccc0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e5/lily-dfa6ccc0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="aligning-marks-with-various-notation-objects.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Aligning marks with various notation objects</h3>
<p>If specified, text marks may be aligned with notation objects other
than bar lines. These objects include <code>ambitus</code>,
<code>breathing-sign</code>, <code>clef</code>, <code>custos</code>, <code>staff-bar</code>,
<code>left-edge</code>, <code>key-cancellation</code>, <code>key-signature</code>, and
<code>time-signature</code>.
<p>In such cases, text marks will be horizontally centered above the
object. However this can be changed, as demonstrated on the second line
of this example (in a score with multiple staves, this setting should
be done for all the staves).
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
e1
% the RehearsalMark will be centered above the Clef
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(clef)
\key a \major
\clef treble
\mark "↓"
e
% the RehearsalMark will be centered above the TimeSignature
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(time-signature)
\key a \major
\clef treble
\time 3/4
\mark "↓"
e2.
% the RehearsalMark will be centered above the KeySignature
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(key-signature)
\key a \major
\clef treble
\time 4/4
\mark "↓"
e1
\break
e
% the RehearsalMark will be aligned with the left edge of the KeySignature
\once \override Score.KeySignature #'break-align-anchor-alignment = #LEFT
\mark "↓"
\key a \major
e
% the RehearsalMark will be aligned with the right edge of the KeySignature
\once \override Score.KeySignature #'break-align-anchor-alignment = #RIGHT
\key a \major
\mark "↓"
e
% the RehearsalMark will be aligned with the left edge of the KeySignature
% and then shifted right by 1 unit.
\once \override Score.KeySignature #'break-align-anchor = #1
\key a \major
\mark "↓"
e1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="fe/lily-abfc1e98.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="fe/lily-abfc1e98.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="blanking-staff-lines-using-the--whiteout-command.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command</h3>
<p>The <code>\whiteout</code> command underlays a markup with a white box.
Since staff lines are in a lower layer than most other grobs, this
white box will not overlap any other grob.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c' {
\override TextScript #'extra-offset = #'(2 . 4)
c2-\markup { \whiteout \pad-markup #0.5 "middle C" } c
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="56/lily-e5c94de5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="56/lily-e5c94de5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="center-text-below-hairpin-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Center text below hairpin dynamics</h3>
<p>This example provides a function to typeset a hairpin (de)crescendo
with some additional text below it, such as "molto" or "poco". The
example also illustrates how to modify the way an object is normally
printed, using some Scheme code.
<pre class="verbatim">
hairpinWithCenteredText = #(define-music-function (parser location text) (markup?)
#{
\override Voice.Hairpin #'stencil = #(lambda (grob)
(ly:stencil-aligned-to
(ly:stencil-combine-at-edge
(ly:stencil-aligned-to (ly:hairpin::print grob) X CENTER)
Y DOWN
(ly:stencil-aligned-to (ly:text-interface::print grob) X CENTER))
X LEFT))
\override Voice.Hairpin #'text = $text
#})
hairpinMolto = \hairpinWithCenteredText \markup { \italic molto }
hairpinMore = \hairpinWithCenteredText \markup { \bigger moltissimo }
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
{
\hairpinMolto c'2\< c'\f
\hairpinMore c'2\< c'\f
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2f/lily-18ead2c8.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2f/lily-18ead2c8.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-default-text-font-family.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the default text font family</h3>
<p>The default font families for text can be overridden with
<code>make-pango-font-tree</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
% change for other default global staff size.
myStaffSize = #20
%{
run
lilypond -dshow-available-fonts blabla
to show all fonts available in the process log.
%}
#(define fonts
(make-pango-font-tree "Times New Roman"
"Nimbus Sans"
"Luxi Mono"
;; "Helvetica"
;; "Courier"
(/ myStaffSize 20)))
}
\relative {
c'^\markup {
roman: foo \bold bla \italic bar \italic \bold baz
}
c'_\markup {
\override #'(font-family . sans)
{
sans: foo \bold bla \italic bar \italic \bold baz
}
}
c'2^\markup {
\override #'(font-family . typewriter)
{
mono: foo \bold bla \italic bar \italic \bold baz
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a1/lily-e2be3d91.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a1/lily-e2be3d91.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="combining-dynamics-with-markup-texts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Combining dynamics with markup texts</h3>
<p>Some dynamics may involve text indications (such as "più forte" or
"piano subito"). They can be produced using a <code>\markup</code> block.
<pre class="verbatim">
piuF = \markup { \italic più \dynamic f }
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c'' {
c2\f c-\piuF
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8e/lily-cc388ac0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8e/lily-cc388ac0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="combining-two-parts-on-the-same-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Combining two parts on the same staff</h3>
<p>The part combiner tool ( <code>\partcombine</code> command ) allows the
combination of several different parts on the same staff. Text
directions such as "solo" or "a2" are added by default; to remove
them, simply set the property <code>printPartCombineTexts</code> to
"false". For vocal scores (hymns), there is no need to add
"solo"/"a2" texts, so they should be switched off. However, it
might be better not to use it if there are any solos, as they won't be
indicated. In such cases, standard polyphonic notation may be
preferable.
<p>This snippet presents the three ways two parts can be printed on a same
staff: standard polyphony, <code>\partcombine</code> without texts, and
<code>\partcombine</code> with texts.
<pre class="verbatim">
musicUp = \relative c'' {
\time 4/4
a4 c4.( g8) a4 |
g4 e' g,( a8 b) |
c b a2.
}
musicDown = \relative c'' {
g4 e4.( d8) c4 |
r2 g'4( f8 e) |
d2 \stemDown a
}
\score {
<<
<<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Standard polyphony "
<< \musicUp \\ \musicDown >>
}
\new Staff \with { printPartCombineTexts = ##f } {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "PartCombine without texts "
\partcombine \musicUp \musicDown
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "PartCombine with texts "
\partcombine \musicUp \musicDown
}
>>
>>
\layout {
indent = 6.0\cm
\context {
\Score
\override SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #30
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="5e/lily-c79da8a0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="5e/lily-c79da8a0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-real-parenthesized-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating "real" parenthesized dynamics</h3>
<p>Although the easiest way to add parentheses to a dynamic mark is to use
a <code>\markup</code> block, this method has a downside: the created
objects will behave like text markups, and not like dynamics.
<p>However, it is possible to create a similar object using the equivalent
Scheme code (as described in "Markup programmer interface"), combined
with the <code>make-dynamic-script</code> function. This way, the markup will
be regarded as a dynamic, and therefore will remain compatible with
commands such as <code>\dynamicUp</code> or <code>\dynamicDown</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper { ragged-right = ##t }
parenF = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:normal-text #:italic
#:fontsize 2 "(" #:hspace -0.8 #:dynamic "f" #:normal-text
#:italic #:fontsize 2 ")"
)))
\relative c'' {
c4\parenF c c \dynamicUp c\parenF
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="71/lily-7346f215.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="71/lily-7346f215.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-simultaneous-rehearsal-marks.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating simultaneous rehearsal marks</h3>
<p>Unlike text scripts, rehearsal marks cannot be stacked at a particular point
in a score: only one <code>RehearsalMark</code> object is created. Using an
invisible measure and bar line, an extra rehearsal mark can be added, giving
the appearance of two marks in the same column.
<p>This method may also prove useful for placing rehearsal marks at both the
end of one system and the start of the following system.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\key a \major
\set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-box-letters
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'outside-staff-priority = #5000
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(key-signature)
\mark \markup { \bold { Senza denti } }
% the hidden measure and bar line
\once \override Score.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
\time 1/16
s16 \bar ""
\time 4/4
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(bar-line)
\mark \markup { \box \bold Intro }
d'1
\mark \default
d'1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="3a/lily-6eac71b0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="3a/lily-6eac71b0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-text-spanners.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating text spanners</h3>
<p>The <code>\startTextSpan</code> and <code>\stopTextSpan</code> commands allow the
creation of text spanners as easily as pedal indications or
octavations. Override some properties of the <code>TextSpanner</code> object
to modify its output.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override TextSpanner #'edge-text = #'("bla" . "blu")
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\override TextSpanner #'dash-period = #2
\override TextSpanner #'dash-fraction = #0.0
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\revert TextSpanner #'style
\override TextSpanner #'style = #'dashed-line \override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'left #'text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . 1) }
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'right #'text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . -2) }
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-13
\override TextSpanner #'dash-period = #10
\override TextSpanner #'dash-fraction = #0.5
\override TextSpanner #'thickness = #10
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-6
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="97/lily-494f79c2.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="97/lily-494f79c2.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="demonstrating-all-headers.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Demonstrating all headers</h3>
<p>All header fields with special meanings.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
copyright = "copyright"
title = "title"
subtitle = "subtitle"
composer = "composer"
arranger = "arranger"
instrument = "instrument"
metre = "metre"
opus = "opus"
piece = "piece"
poet = "poet"
texidoc = "All header fields with special meanings."
copyright = "public domain"
enteredby = "jcn"
source = "urtext"
}
\layout {
ragged-right = ##f
}
\score {
\relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c }
}
\score {
\relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c }
\header {
title = "localtitle"
subtitle = "localsubtitle"
composer = "localcomposer"
arranger = "localarranger"
instrument = "localinstrument"
metre = "localmetre"
opus = "localopus"
piece = "localpiece"
poet = "localpoet"
copyright = "localcopyright"
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="82/lily-bd13e6d5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="82/lily-bd13e6d5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="embedding-native-postscript-in-a--markup-block.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block</h3>
<p>PostScript code can be directly inserted inside a <code>\markup</code>
block.
<pre class="verbatim">
% PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
\relative c'' {
a4-\markup { \postscript #"3 4 moveto 5 3 rlineto stroke" }
-\markup { \postscript #"[ 0 1 ] 0 setdash 3 5 moveto 5 -3 rlineto stroke " }
b4-\markup { \postscript #"3 4 moveto 0 0 1 2 8 4 20 3.5 rcurveto stroke" }
s2
a'1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8f/lily-cec3187d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8f/lily-cec3187d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="formatting-lyrics-syllables.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Formatting lyrics syllables</h3>
<p>To format individual syllables in lyrics, use <code>\markup { ....
}</code> on these lyrics.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Tip taken from http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/lilypond-user/2007-12/msg00215.html
\header {
title = "Markup can be used inside lyrics!"
}
mel = \relative c'' { c4 c c c }
lyr = \lyricmode {
Lyrics \markup { \italic "can" } \markup {\with-color #red "contain" }
\markup {\fontsize #8 \bold "Markup!" }
}
<<
\context Voice = melody \mel
\context Lyrics \lyricsto melody \lyr
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4a/lily-a3b88491.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4a/lily-a3b88491.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="how-to-put-ties-between-syllables-in-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">How to put ties between syllables in lyrics</h3>
<p>This can be achieved by separating those syllables by tildes.
<pre class="verbatim">
\lyrics {
wa~o~a
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="07/lily-e98c6f9f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="07/lily-e98c6f9f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="markup-lines.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Markup lines</h3>
<p>Text that can spread over pages is entered with the
<code>\markuplines</code> command.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-default-paper-size "a6")
#(define-markup-list-command (paragraph layout props args) (markup-list?)
(interpret-markup-list layout props
(make-justified-lines-markup-list (cons (make-hspace-markup 2) args))))
% Candide, Voltaire
\markuplines \override-lines #'(baseline-skip . 2.5) {
\paragraph {
Il y avait en Westphalie, dans le château de M. le baron de
Thunder-ten-tronckh, un jeune garçon à qui la nature avait donné
les mœurs les plus douces. Sa physionomie annonçait son âme.
Il avait le jugement assez droit, avec l'esprit le plus simple ;
c'est, je crois, pour cette raison qu'on le nommait Candide. Les
anciens domestiques de la maison soupçonnaient qu'il était fils
de la sœur de monsieur le baron et d'un bon et honnête
gentilhomme du voisinage, que cette demoiselle ne voulut jamais
épouser parce qu'il n'avait pu prouver que soixante et onze
quartiers, et que le reste de son arbre généalogique avait été
perdu par l'injure du temps.
}
\paragraph {
Monsieur le baron était un des plus puissants seigneurs de la
Westphalie, car son château avait une porte et des fenêtres. Sa
grande salle même était ornée d'une tapisserie. Tous les chiens
de ses basses-cours composaient une meute dans le besoin ; ses
palefreniers étaient ses piqueurs; le vicaire du village était
son grand-aumônier. Ils l'appelaient tous monseigneur, et ils
riaient quand il faisait des contes.
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="71/lily-abf5e616.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="71/lily-abf5e616.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ottava-text.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ottava text</h3>
<p>Internally, the <code>set-octavation</code> function sets the properties
<code>ottavation</code> (for example, to <code>"8va"</code> or <code>"8vb"</code>)
and <code>middleCPosition</code>. To override the text of the bracket, set
<code>ottavation</code> after invoking <code>set-octavation</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\ottava #1
\set Staff.ottavation = #"8"
c''1
\ottava #0
c'1
\ottava #1
\set Staff.ottavation = #"Text"
c''1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f1/lily-d72a333b.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f1/lily-d72a333b.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="outputting-the-version-number.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Outputting the version number</h3>
<p>By putting the output of <code>lilypond-version</code> into a lyric or a
text markup, it is possible to print the version number of LilyPond in
a score, or in a document generated with <code>lilypond-book</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new Lyrics {
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
\mark #(ly:export (string-append "Processed with LilyPond version "
(lilypond-version)))
s2
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="98/lily-cd5a4c11.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="98/lily-cd5a4c11.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-centered-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with centered lyrics</h3>
<p>Instead of having a full staff for the melody and lyrics, lyrics can be
centered between the staves of a piano staff.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
\score {
\new GrandStaff <<
\new Staff = upper { \new Voice = "singer" \upper }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "singer" \text
\new Staff = lower { \lower }
>>
\layout {
\context {
\GrandStaff
\accepts "Lyrics"
}
\context {
\Lyrics
\consists "Bar_engraver"
}
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="37/lily-c18abd8d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="37/lily-c18abd8d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-marks-at-the-end-of-a-line-or-a-score.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing marks at the end of a line or a score</h3>
<p>Marks can be printed at the end of the current line, instead of the
beginning of the following line. This is particularly useful when a
mark has to be added at the end of a score – when there is no next
line.
<p>In such cases, the right end of the mark has to be aligned with the
final bar line, as demonstrated on the second line of this example.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
g2 c
d,2 a'
\mark \default
\break
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #RIGHT
g2 b,
c1 \bar "||"
\mark "D.C. al Fine"
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="42/lily-9f469508.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="42/lily-9f469508.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-marks-on-every-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing marks on every staff</h3>
<p>Although text marks are normally only printed above the topmost staff,
they may also be printed on every staff.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\new Score \with {
\remove "Mark_engraver"
}
<<
\new Staff \with {
\consists "Mark_engraver"
}
{ c''1 \mark "molto" c'' }
\new Staff \with {
\consists "Mark_engraver"
}
{ c'1 \mark "molto" c' }
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f6/lily-86a87143.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f6/lily-86a87143.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="three-sided-box.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Three-sided box</h3>
<p>This example shows how to add a markup command to get a three sided box
around some text (or other markup).
<pre class="verbatim">
% New command to add a three sided box, with sides north, west and south
% Based on the box-stencil command defined in scm/stencil.scm
% Note that you use ";" to comment a line in Scheme
#(define-public (NWS-box-stencil stencil thickness padding)
"Add a box around STENCIL, producing a new stencil."
(let* ((x-ext (interval-widen (ly:stencil-extent stencil 0) padding))
(y-ext (interval-widen (ly:stencil-extent stencil 1) padding))
(y-rule (make-filled-box-stencil (cons 0 thickness) y-ext))
(x-rule (make-filled-box-stencil
(interval-widen x-ext thickness) (cons 0 thickness))))
; (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil X 1 y-rule padding))
(set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil X -1 y-rule padding))
(set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil Y 1 x-rule 0.0))
(set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil Y -1 x-rule 0.0))
stencil))
% The corresponding markup command, based on the \box command defined
% in scm/define-markup-commands.scm
#(define-markup-command (NWS-box layout props arg) (markup?)
"Draw a box round @var{arg}. Looks at @code{thickness},
@code{box-padding} and @code{font-size} properties to determine line
thickness and padding around the markup."
(let* ((th (chain-assoc-get 'thickness props 0.1))
(size (chain-assoc-get 'font-size props 0))
(pad (* (magstep size)
(chain-assoc-get 'box-padding props 0.2)))
(m (interpret-markup layout props arg)))
(NWS-box-stencil m th pad)))
% Test it:
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c' {
c2^\markup { \NWS-box ABCD }
c^\markup { \NWS-box \note #"4" #1.0 }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ea/lily-0cb168f8.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ea/lily-0cb168f8.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="utf-8.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">UTF-8</h3>
<p>Various scripts may be used for texts (like titles and
lyrics) by entering them in UTF-8 encoding, and using a Pango based
backend. Depending on the fonts installed, this fragment will
render Bulgarian (Cyrillic), Hebrew, Japanese and Portuguese.
<pre class="verbatim">
% end verbatim - this comment is a hack to prevent texinfo.tex
% from choking on non-European UTF-8 subsets
% Cyrillic font
bulgarian = \lyricmode {
Жълтата дюля беше щастлива, че пухът, който цъфна, замръзна като гьон.
}
hebrew = \lyricmode {
זה כיף סתם לשמוע איך תנצח קרפד עץ טוב בגן.
}
japanese = \lyricmode {
いろはにほへど ちりぬるを
わがよたれぞ つねならむ
うゐのおくや まけふこえて
あさきゆめみじ ゑひもせず
}
% "a legal song to you"
portuguese = \lyricmode {
à vo -- cê uma can -- ção legal
}
\relative {
c2 d
e2 f
g2 f
e1
}
\addlyrics { \bulgarian }
\addlyrics { \hebrew }
\addlyrics { \japanese }
\addlyrics { \portuguese }
</pre>
<p>
<a href="48/lily-0b3aec49.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="48/lily-0b3aec49.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template-with-lyrics-aligned-below-and-above-the-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template with lyrics aligned below and above the staves</h3>
<p>This template is basically the same as the simple "Vocal ensemble"
template, with the exception that here all the lyrics lines are placed
using <code>alignAboveContext</code> and <code>alignBelowContext</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords = \lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> }
\new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = women } \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = women } \lyricsto altos \altoWords
% we could remove the line about this with the line below, since we want
% the alto lyrics to be below the alto Voice anyway.
% \new Lyrics \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> }
\new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = men } \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = men } \lyricsto basses \bassWords
% again, we could replace the line above this with the line below.
% \new Lyrics \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f3/lily-a11d4879.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f3/lily-a11d4879.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Vocal-music"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Vocal music</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Vocal-music">Vocal music</a>.
<p><a name="adding-ambitus-per-voice.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding ambitus per voice</h3>
<p>Ambitus can be added per voice. In this case, the ambitus must be moved
manually to prevent collisions.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new Staff <<
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
} \relative c'' {
\override Ambitus #'X-offset = #2.0
\voiceOne
c4 a d e
f1
}
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
} \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
es4 f g as
b1
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4f/lily-6712adbe.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4f/lily-6712adbe.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adjusting-lyrics-vertical-spacing.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adjusting lyrics vertical spacing</h3>
<p>This snippet shows how to bring the lyrics line closer to the staff.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Default layout:
<<
\new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' {
c4 d e f
g4 f e d
c1
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa }
% Reducing the minimum space below the staff and above the lyrics:
\new Staff \with {
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1 . 4)
}
\new Voice = melody \relative c' {
c4 d e f
g4 f e d
c1
}
\new Lyrics \with {
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1.2 . 1)
}
\lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="25/lily-be0a47ca.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="25/lily-be0a47ca.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="aligning-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Aligning lyrics</h3>
<p>Horizontal alignment for lyrics cam be set by overriding the
<code>self-alignment-X</code> property of the <code>LyricText</code> object.
<code>#-1</code> is left, <code>#0</code> is center and <code>#1</code> is right;
however, you can use <code>#LEFT</code>, <code>#CENTER</code> and <code>#RIGHT</code> as
well.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c'' {
c1
c1
c1
}
\addlyrics {
\once \override LyricText #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
"This is left-aligned"
\once \override LyricText #'self-alignment-X = #CENTER
"This is centered"
\once \override LyricText #'self-alignment-X = #1
"This is right-aligned"
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e5/lily-dfa6ccc0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e5/lily-dfa6ccc0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ambitus-with-multiple-voices.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ambitus with multiple voices</h3>
<p>Adding the <code>Ambitus_engraver</code> to the <code>Staff</code> context creates
a single ambitus per staff, even in the case of staves with multiple
voices.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new Staff \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
}
<<
\new Voice \relative c'' {
\voiceOne
c4 a d e
f1
}
\new Voice \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
es4 f g as
b1
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f9/lily-1e5f126e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f9/lily-1e5f126e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="chant-or-psalms-notation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Chant or psalms notation</h3>
<p>This form of notation is used for the chant of the Psalms, where verses
aren't always the same length.
<pre class="verbatim">
stemOn = { \override Staff.Stem #'transparent = ##f }
stemOff = { \override Staff.Stem #'transparent = ##t }
\score {
\new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" }
{
\key g \minor
\set Score.timing = ##f
\stemOff a'\breve bes'4 g'4
\stemOn a'2 \bar "||"
\stemOff a'\breve g'4 a'4
\stemOn f'2 \bar "||"
\stemOff a'\breve^\markup { \italic flexe }
\stemOn g'2 \bar "||"
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="36/lily-43a8112c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="36/lily-43a8112c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="demo-midiinstruments.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Demo MidiInstruments</h3>
<p>Problem: How to know which <code>midiInstrument</code> would be best for your
composition? Solution: A LilyPond demo file.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
title = "Demo of all midi sounds"
arranger = "Myself "
}
basemelodie = \relative c' {
c4. \mf g c16 b' c d
e16 d e f g4 g'4 r
R1
}
melodie = { \tempo 4 = 150 \basemelodie }
\score {
\new Staff <<
\new Voice { \melodie
}
>>
\layout { }
}
\score {
\new Staff <<
%\set Staff.instrumentName= #"S/A"
%\set Staff.midiMinimumVolume = #0.2
%\set Staff.midiMaximumVolume = #0.4
%\set Voice.dynamicAbsoluteVolumeFunction = #0.6
\new Voice { r \mf
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic grand" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bright acoustic" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric grand" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"honky-tonk" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric piano 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric piano 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"harpsichord" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clav" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"celesta" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"glockenspiel" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"music box" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"vibraphone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"marimba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"xylophone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tubular bells" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"dulcimer" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"drawbar organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"percussive organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"rock organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"church organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"reed organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"accordion" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"harmonica" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"concertina" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic guitar (nylon)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic guitar (steel)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (jazz)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (clean)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (muted)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"overdriven guitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"distorted guitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic bass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric bass (finger)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric bass (pick)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fretless bass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"slap bass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"slap bass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth bass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth bass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"violin" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"viola" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"cello" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"contrabass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tremolo strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pizzicato strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"orchestral strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"timpani" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"string ensemble 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"string ensemble 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthstrings 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthstrings 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"choir aahs" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"voice oohs" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth voice" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"orchestra hit" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trombone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tuba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"muted trumpet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"french horn" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"brass section" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthbrass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthbrass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"soprano sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"alto sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tenor sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"baritone sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"oboe" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"english horn" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bassoon" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clarinet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"piccolo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"flute" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"recorder" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pan flute" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"blown bottle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shakuhachi" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"whistle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"ocarina" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 1 (square)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 2 (sawtooth)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 3 (calliope)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 4 (chiff)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 5 (charang)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 6 (voice)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 7 (fifths)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 8 (bass+lead)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 1 (new age)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 2 (warm)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 3 (polysynth)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 4 (choir)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 5 (bowed)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 6 (metallic)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 7 (halo)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 8 (sweep)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 1 (rain)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 2 (soundtrack)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 3 (crystal)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 4 (atmosphere)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 5 (brightness)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 6 (goblins)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 7 (echoes)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 8 (sci-fi)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"sitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"banjo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shamisen" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"koto" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"kalimba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bagpipe" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fiddle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shanai" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tinkle bell" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"agogo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"steel drums" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"woodblock" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"taiko drum" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"melodic tom" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth drum" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"reverse cymbal" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"guitar fret noise" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"breath noise" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"seashore" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bird tweet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"telephone ring" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"helicopter" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"applause" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"gunshot" \melodie
}
>>
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-d2f91df9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-d2f91df9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="formatting-lyrics-syllables.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Formatting lyrics syllables</h3>
<p>To format individual syllables in lyrics, use <code>\markup { ....
}</code> on these lyrics.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Tip taken from http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/lilypond-user/2007-12/msg00215.html
\header {
title = "Markup can be used inside lyrics!"
}
mel = \relative c'' { c4 c c c }
lyr = \lyricmode {
Lyrics \markup { \italic "can" } \markup {\with-color #red "contain" }
\markup {\fontsize #8 \bold "Markup!" }
}
<<
\context Voice = melody \mel
\context Lyrics \lyricsto melody \lyr
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4a/lily-a3b88491.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4a/lily-a3b88491.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="how-to-put-ties-between-syllables-in-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">How to put ties between syllables in lyrics</h3>
<p>This can be achieved by separating those syllables by tildes.
<pre class="verbatim">
\lyrics {
wa~o~a
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="07/lily-e98c6f9f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="07/lily-e98c6f9f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-melody-and-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with melody and lyrics</h3>
<p>Here is a typical song format: one staff with the melody and lyrics,
with piano accompaniment underneath.
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a b c d
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
\score {
<<
\new Voice = "mel" { \autoBeamOff \melody }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto mel \text
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" \upper
\new Staff = "lower" \lower
>>
>>
\layout {
\context { \RemoveEmptyStaffContext }
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="68/lily-e6876100.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="68/lily-e6876100.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes,-lyrics,-and-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes, lyrics, and chords</h3>
<p>This template allows the preparation of a song with melody, words, and
chords.
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
harmonies = \chordmode {
a2 c
}
\score {
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set chordChanges = ##t
\harmonies
}
\new Voice = "one" { \autoBeamOff \melody }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2c/lily-39f4b2ad.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2c/lily-39f4b2ad.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes,-lyrics,-chords-and-frets.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes, lyrics, chords and frets</h3>
<p>Here is a simple lead sheet template with melody, lyrics, chords and
fret diagrams.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Define the fret diagrams to be used
cFretDiagram = \markup {
\fret-diagram #"6-x;5-3-3;4-2-2;3-o;2-1-1;1-o;"
}
gFretDiagram = \markup {
\fret-diagram #"6-3-2;5-2-1;4-o;3-o;2-o;1-3-3;"
}
verseI = \lyricmode {
\set stanza = #"1."
This is the first verse
}
verseII = \lyricmode {
\set stanza = #"2."
This is the second verse.
}
theChords = \new ChordNames {
\chordmode {
% insert the chords for chordnames here
c2 g4 c
}
}
staffMelody = \new Staff {
\context Voice = "voiceMelody" {
\key c \major
\clef treble
\relative c' {
% Type notes and fret diagram markups here
c4^\cFretDiagram d8 e f4^\gFretDiagram g^\cFretDiagram
\bar "|."
}
}
}
\score {
<<
\theChords
\staffMelody
\new Lyrics = "lyricsI" \lyricmode {
\lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseI
}
\new Lyrics = "lyricsII" \lyricmode {
\lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseII
}
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="65/lily-041c2551.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="65/lily-041c2551.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes-and-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes and lyrics</h3>
<p>This small template demonstrates a simple melody with lyrics. Cut and
paste, add notes, then words for the lyrics. This example turns off
automatic beaming, which is common for vocal parts. To use automatic
beaming, change or comment out the relevant line.
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
\score{
<<
\new Voice = "one" {
\autoBeamOff
\melody
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="31/lily-35228590.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="31/lily-35228590.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="skips-in-lyric-mode-2.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Skips in lyric mode (2)</h3>
<p>Although <code>s</code> skips cannot be used in <code>\lyricmode</code> (it is
taken to be a literal "s", not a space), double quotes (<code>""</code>)
or underscores (<code>_</code>) are available.So for example:
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\relative c'' { a4 b c d }
\new Lyrics \lyricmode { a4 "" _ gap }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d8/lily-8cca9479.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d8/lily-8cca9479.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="skips-in-lyric-mode.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Skips in lyric mode</h3>
<p>The <code>s</code> syntax for skips is only available in note mode and chord
mode. In other situations, for example, when entering lyrics, using the
<code>\skip</code> command is recommended.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\relative { a'1 a }
\new Lyrics \lyricmode { \skip 1 bla1 }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="20/lily-845ca688.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="20/lily-845ca688.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vertically-aligning-ossias-and-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vertically aligning ossias and lyrics</h3>
<p>This snippet demonstrates the use of the context properties
<code>alignBelowContext</code> and <code>alignAboveContext</code> to control the
positioning of lyrics and ossias.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
ragged-right = ##t
}
\relative c' <<
\new Staff = "1" { c4 c s2 }
\new Staff = "2" { c4 c s2 }
\new Staff = "3" { c4 c s2 }
{ \skip 2
<<
\lyrics {
\set alignBelowContext = #"1"
lyrics4 below
}
\new Staff \with {
alignAboveContext = #"3"
fontSize = #-2
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -2)
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
} {
\times 4/6 {
\override TextScript #'padding = #3
c8^"ossia above" d e d e f
}
}
>>
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-7de9f8d7.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-7de9f8d7.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vertically-centered-common-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vertically centered common lyrics</h3>
<p>In a vocal piece where there are several (two,four or more) lines of
lyrics, and common lyrics for all voices at some point, these common
lyrics may be vertically centered regardingly, as shown in the
following example:
<pre class="verbatim">
\include "english.ly"
leftbrace = \markup { \override #'(font-encoding . fetaBraces) \lookup #"brace240" }
rightbrace = \markup { \rotate #180 \leftbrace }
dropLyrics =
{
\override LyricText #'extra-offset = #'(0 . -5)
\override LyricHyphen #'extra-offset = #'(0 . -5)
\override LyricExtender #'extra-offset = #'(0 . -5)
}
raiseLyrics =
{
\revert LyricText #'extra-offset
\revert LyricHyphen #'extra-offset
\revert LyricExtender #'extra-offset
}
skipFour = \repeat unfold 4 { \skip 8 }
lyricsA = \lyricmode { The first verse has \dropLyrics the com -- mon
__ words \raiseLyrics used in all four. }
lyricsB = \lyricmode { In stan -- za two, \skipFour al -- so ap -- pear. }
lyricsC = \lyricmode { By the third verse, \skipFour are get -- ting dull. }
lyricsD = \lyricmode { Last stan -- za, and \skipFour get used once more. }
melody = \relative c' { c4 d e f g f e8( e f) d4 c e d c }
\score
{
<<
\new Voice = m \melody
\new Lyrics \lyricsto m \lyricsA
\new Lyrics \lyricsto m \lyricsB
\new Lyrics \lyricsto m \lyricsC
\new Lyrics \lyricsto m \lyricsD
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="65/lily-9e89d797.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="65/lily-9e89d797.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template-with-automatic-piano-reduction.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template with automatic piano reduction</h3>
<p>This template adds an automatic piano reduction to the standard SATB
vocal score demonstrated in "Vocal ensemble template". This
demonstrates one of the strengths of LilyPond – you can use a music
definition more than once. If any changes are made to the vocal notes
(say, <code>tenorMusic</code>), then the changes will also apply to the piano
reduction.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords =\lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
<<
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Lyrics = sopranos { s1 }
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = sopranos { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> }
\new Voice = altos { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics = altos { s1 }
\new Lyrics = tenors { s1 }
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = tenors { \voiceOne <<\global \tenorMusic >> }
\new Voice = basses { \voiceTwo <<\global \bassMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics = basses { s1 }
\context Lyrics = sopranos \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\context Lyrics = altos \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\context Lyrics = tenors \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\context Lyrics = basses \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff <<
\set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f
\partcombine
<< \global \sopMusic >>
<< \global \altoMusic >>
>>
\new Staff <<
\clef bass
\set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f
\partcombine
<< \global \tenorMusic >>
<< \global \bassMusic >>
>>
>>
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="99/lily-1164d362.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="99/lily-1164d362.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template-with-lyrics-aligned-below-and-above-the-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template with lyrics aligned below and above the staves</h3>
<p>This template is basically the same as the simple "Vocal ensemble"
template, with the exception that here all the lyrics lines are placed
using <code>alignAboveContext</code> and <code>alignBelowContext</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords = \lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> }
\new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = women } \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = women } \lyricsto altos \altoWords
% we could remove the line about this with the line below, since we want
% the alto lyrics to be below the alto Voice anyway.
% \new Lyrics \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> }
\new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = men } \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = men } \lyricsto basses \bassWords
% again, we could replace the line above this with the line below.
% \new Lyrics \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f3/lily-a11d4879.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f3/lily-a11d4879.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template</h3>
<p>Here is a standard four-part SATB vocal score. With larger ensembles,
it is often useful to include a section which is included in all parts.
For example, the time signature and key signature are almost always the
same for all parts. Like in the "Hymn" template, the four voices are
regrouped on only two staves.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords = \lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Lyrics = sopranos { s1 }
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = "sopranos" {
\voiceOne
<< \global \sopMusic >>
}
\new Voice = "altos" {
\voiceTwo
<< \global \altoMusic >>
}
>>
\new Lyrics = "altos" { s1 }
\new Lyrics = "tenors" { s1 }
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = "tenors" {
\voiceOne
<< \global \tenorMusic >>
}
\new Voice = "basses" {
\voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >>
}
>>
\new Lyrics = basses { s1 }
\context Lyrics = sopranos \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\context Lyrics = altos \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\context Lyrics = tenors \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\context Lyrics = basses \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b2/lily-b266ca1f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b2/lily-b266ca1f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Chords"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Chords</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Chord-notation">Chord notation</a>.
<p><a name="adding-a-figured-bass-above-or-below-the-notes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding a figured bass above or below the notes</h3>
<p>When writing a figured bass, here's a way to specify if you want your
figures to be placed above or below the bass notes, by defining the
<code>BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction</code> property (exclusively
in a <code>Staff</code> context). Choices are <code>#UP</code> (or <code>#1</code>),
<code>#CENTER</code> (or <code>#0</code>) and <code>#DOWN</code> (or <code>#-1</code>).
<p>As you can see here, this property can be changed as many times as you
wish. Use <code>\once \override</code> if you don't want the tweak to apply
to the whole score.
<pre class="verbatim">
bass = { \clef bass g4 b, c d e d8 c d2}
continuo = \figuremode {
< _ >4 < 6 >8
\once \override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #CENTER
<5/> < _ >4
\override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #UP
< _+ > < 6 >
\set Staff.useBassFigureExtenders = ##t
\override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #DOWN
< 4 >4. < 4 >8 < _+ >4
}
\score {
<< \new Staff = bassStaff \bass
\context Staff = bassStaff \continuo >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c3/lily-30b0c753.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c3/lily-30b0c753.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adding-bar-lines-to-chordnames-context.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding bar lines to ChordNames context</h3>
<p>To add bar line indications in the <code>ChordNames</code> context, add the
<code>Bar_engraver</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new ChordNames \with {
\override BarLine #'bar-size = #4
\consists "Bar_engraver"
}
\chordmode {
f1:maj7 f:7 bes:7
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="05/lily-007354c5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="05/lily-007354c5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-chord-separator.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing chord separator</h3>
<p>The separator between different parts of a chord name can be set to any
markup.
<pre class="verbatim">
\chords {
c:7sus4
\set chordNameSeparator
= \markup { \typewriter | }
c:7sus4
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ef/lily-83aff558.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ef/lily-83aff558.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-chord-names-to-german-or-semi-german-notation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the chord names to German or semi-German notation</h3>
<p>The english naming of chords (default) can be changed to german
(<code>\germanChords</code> replaces B and Bes to H and B) or semi-german
(<code>\semiGermanChords</code> replaces B and Bes to H and Bb).
<pre class="verbatim">
music = \chordmode {
c1/c cis/cis
b/b bis/bis bes/bes
}
%% The following is only here to print the names of the
%% chords styles; it can be removed if you do not need to
%% print them.
\layout {
\context {\ChordNames \consists Instrument_name_engraver }
}
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set ChordNames.instrumentName = #"default"
\music
}
\new ChordNames {
\set ChordNames.instrumentName = #"german"
\germanChords \music }
\new ChordNames {
\set ChordNames.instrumentName = #"semi-german"
\semiGermanChords \music }
\context Voice { \music }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="88/lily-241c7b92.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="88/lily-241c7b92.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-positions-of-figured-bass-alterations.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the positions of figured bass alterations</h3>
<p>Accidentals and plus signs can appear before or after the numbers,
depending on the <code>figuredBassAlterationDirection</code> and
<code>figuredBassPlusDirection</code> properties.
<pre class="verbatim">
\figures {
<6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
\set figuredBassAlterationDirection = #RIGHT
<6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
\set figuredBassPlusDirection = #RIGHT
<6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
\set figuredBassAlterationDirection = #LEFT
<6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="85/lily-62ee5ccc.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="85/lily-62ee5ccc.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="chord-name-exceptions.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Chord name exceptions</h3>
<p>The property <code>chordNameExceptions</code> can be used to store a list of
special notations for specific chords.
<pre class="verbatim">
% modify maj9 and 6(add9)
% Exception music is chords with markups
chExceptionMusic = {
<c e g b d'>1-\markup { \super "maj9" }
<c e g a d'>1-\markup { \super "6(add9)" }
}
% Convert music to list and prepend to existing exceptions.
chExceptions = #( append
( sequential-music-to-chord-exceptions chExceptionMusic #t)
ignatzekExceptions)
theMusic = \chordmode {
g1:maj9 g1:6.9
\set chordNameExceptions = #chExceptions
g1:maj9 g1:6.9
}
\layout {
ragged-right = ##t
}
<< \context ChordNames \theMusic
\context Voice \theMusic
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="7e/lily-f3b7d9a3.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="7e/lily-f3b7d9a3.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="clusters.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Clusters</h3>
<p>Clusters are a device to denote that a complete range of notes is to be
played.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
ragged-right = ##t
}
fragment = \relative c' {
c4 f <e d'>4
<g a>8 <e a> a4 c2 <d b>4
e2 c
}
<<
\new Staff \fragment
\new Staff \makeClusters \fragment
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="67/lily-7b23dbb9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="67/lily-7b23dbb9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="controlling-the-placement-of-chord-fingerings.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Controlling the placement of chord fingerings</h3>
<p>The placement of fingering numbers can be controlled precisely.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(right)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>2
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up right down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="de/lily-34875599.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="de/lily-34875599.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="manually-break-figured-bass-extenders-for-only-some-numbers.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Manually break figured bass extenders for only some numbers</h3>
<p>Figured bass often uses extenders to indicate continuation of the
corresponding step. However, in this case lilypond is in greedy-mode
and uses extenders whenever possible. To break individual extenders,
one can simply use a modifier \! to a number, which breaks any
extender attributed to that number right before the number.
<pre class="verbatim">
bassfigures = \figuremode {
\set useBassFigureExtenders = ##t
<6 4>4 <6 4\!> <6 4\!> <6 4\!> | <6\! 4\!> <6 4> <6 4\!> <6 4>
}
<<
\new Staff \relative c'' { c1 c1 }
\new FiguredBass \bassfigures
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9b/lily-4eb6597f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9b/lily-4eb6597f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="showing-chords-at-changes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Showing chords at changes</h3>
<p>Chord names can be displayed only at the start of lines and when the
chord changes.
<pre class="verbatim">
harmonies = \chordmode {
c1:m c:m \break c:m c:m d
}
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set chordChanges = ##t
\harmonies
}
\new Staff {
\relative c' { \harmonies }
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="40/lily-172c2808.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="40/lily-172c2808.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="simple-lead-sheet.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Simple lead sheet</h3>
<p>When put together, chord names, a melody, and lyrics form a lead sheet:
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\chords { c2 g:sus4 f e }
\relative c'' {
a4 e c8 e r4
b2 c4( d)
}
\addlyrics { One day this shall be free __ }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="0b/lily-af9b8f17.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="0b/lily-af9b8f17.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes,-lyrics,-and-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes, lyrics, and chords</h3>
<p>This template allows the preparation of a song with melody, words, and
chords.
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
harmonies = \chordmode {
a2 c
}
\score {
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set chordChanges = ##t
\harmonies
}
\new Voice = "one" { \autoBeamOff \melody }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2c/lily-39f4b2ad.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2c/lily-39f4b2ad.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes,-lyrics,-chords-and-frets.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes, lyrics, chords and frets</h3>
<p>Here is a simple lead sheet template with melody, lyrics, chords and
fret diagrams.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Define the fret diagrams to be used
cFretDiagram = \markup {
\fret-diagram #"6-x;5-3-3;4-2-2;3-o;2-1-1;1-o;"
}
gFretDiagram = \markup {
\fret-diagram #"6-3-2;5-2-1;4-o;3-o;2-o;1-3-3;"
}
verseI = \lyricmode {
\set stanza = #"1."
This is the first verse
}
verseII = \lyricmode {
\set stanza = #"2."
This is the second verse.
}
theChords = \new ChordNames {
\chordmode {
% insert the chords for chordnames here
c2 g4 c
}
}
staffMelody = \new Staff {
\context Voice = "voiceMelody" {
\key c \major
\clef treble
\relative c' {
% Type notes and fret diagram markups here
c4^\cFretDiagram d8 e f4^\gFretDiagram g^\cFretDiagram
\bar "|."
}
}
}
\score {
<<
\theChords
\staffMelody
\new Lyrics = "lyricsI" \lyricmode {
\lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseI
}
\new Lyrics = "lyricsII" \lyricmode {
\lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseII
}
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="65/lily-041c2551.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="65/lily-041c2551.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes-and-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes and chords</h3>
<p>Want to prepare a lead sheet with a melody and chords? Look no further!
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
f4 e8[ c] d4 g
a2 ~ a
}
harmonies = \chordmode {
c4:m f:min7 g:maj c:aug
d2:dim b:sus
}
\score {
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set chordChanges = ##t
\harmonies
}
\new Staff \melody
>>
\layout{ }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="dd/lily-c67e885a.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="dd/lily-c67e885a.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="volta-below-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Volta under chords</h3>
<p>By adding the <code>Volta_engraver</code> to the relevant
staff, volte can be put under chords.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
<<
\chords {
c1
c1
}
\new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } {
\repeat volta 2 { c'1 }
\alternative { c' }
}
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Volta_engraver"
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="22/lily-5adaa60e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="22/lily-5adaa60e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Keyboards"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Keyboards</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Keyboard-instruments">Keyboard instruments</a>.
<p><a name="accordion-discant-symbols.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Accordion-discant symbols</h3>
<p>Accordion discant-specific symbols are added using <code>\markup</code>. The
vertical placement of the symbols can be tweaked by changing the
<code>\raise</code> arguments.
<pre class="verbatim">
discant = \markup {
\musicglyph #"accordion.accDiscant"
}
dot = \markup {
\musicglyph #"accordion.accDot"
}
% 16 voets register
accBasson = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\raise #0.5 \dot
}
% een korig 8 en 16 voets register
accBandon = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\raise #1.5 \dot
}
accVCello = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
}
% 4-8-16 voets register
accHarmon = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accTrombon = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
}
% eenkorig 4 en 16 voets register
accOrgan = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accMaster = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accAccord = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accMusette = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
}
accCeleste = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
}
accOboe = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accClarin = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\raise #1.5 \dot
}
accPiccolo = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accViolin = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
\relative c'' {
c4 d\accBasson e f
c4 d\accBandon e f
c4 d\accVCello e f
c4 d\accHarmon e f
c4 d\accTrombon e f
c4 d\accOrgan e f
c4 d\accMaster e f
c4 d\accAccord e f
c4 d\accMusette e f
c4 d\accCeleste e f
c4 d\accOboe e f
c4 d\accClarin e f
c4 d\accPiccolo e f
c4 d\accViolin e f
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="60/lily-f324a46f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="60/lily-f324a46f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="clusters.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Clusters</h3>
<p>Clusters are a device to denote that a complete range of notes is to be
played.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
ragged-right = ##t
}
fragment = \relative c' {
c4 f <e d'>4
<g a>8 <e a> a4 c2 <d b>4
e2 c
}
<<
\new Staff \fragment
\new Staff \makeClusters \fragment
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="67/lily-7b23dbb9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="67/lily-7b23dbb9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="controlling-the-placement-of-chord-fingerings.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Controlling the placement of chord fingerings</h3>
<p>The placement of fingering numbers can be controlled precisely.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(right)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>2
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up right down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="de/lily-34875599.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="de/lily-34875599.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-slurs-across-voices.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating slurs across voices</h3>
<p>In some situations, it may be necessary to create slurs between notes
from different voices.
<p>The solution is to add invisible notes to one of the voices, using
<code>\hideNotes</code>.
<p>This example is measure 235 of the Ciaconna from Bach's 2nd Partita for
solo violin, BWV 1004.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<< {
d16( a') s a s a[ s a] s a[ s a]
}
\\
{
\slurUp
bes,16[ s e](
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes f[(
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes fis](
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes g[(
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes gis](
\hideNotes a)
} >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ce/lily-e9383e5e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ce/lily-e9383e5e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="demo-midiinstruments.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Demo MidiInstruments</h3>
<p>Problem: How to know which <code>midiInstrument</code> would be best for your
composition? Solution: A LilyPond demo file.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
title = "Demo of all midi sounds"
arranger = "Myself "
}
basemelodie = \relative c' {
c4. \mf g c16 b' c d
e16 d e f g4 g'4 r
R1
}
melodie = { \tempo 4 = 150 \basemelodie }
\score {
\new Staff <<
\new Voice { \melodie
}
>>
\layout { }
}
\score {
\new Staff <<
%\set Staff.instrumentName= #"S/A"
%\set Staff.midiMinimumVolume = #0.2
%\set Staff.midiMaximumVolume = #0.4
%\set Voice.dynamicAbsoluteVolumeFunction = #0.6
\new Voice { r \mf
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic grand" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bright acoustic" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric grand" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"honky-tonk" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric piano 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric piano 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"harpsichord" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clav" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"celesta" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"glockenspiel" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"music box" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"vibraphone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"marimba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"xylophone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tubular bells" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"dulcimer" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"drawbar organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"percussive organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"rock organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"church organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"reed organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"accordion" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"harmonica" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"concertina" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic guitar (nylon)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic guitar (steel)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (jazz)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (clean)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (muted)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"overdriven guitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"distorted guitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic bass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric bass (finger)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric bass (pick)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fretless bass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"slap bass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"slap bass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth bass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth bass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"violin" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"viola" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"cello" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"contrabass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tremolo strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pizzicato strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"orchestral strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"timpani" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"string ensemble 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"string ensemble 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthstrings 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthstrings 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"choir aahs" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"voice oohs" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth voice" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"orchestra hit" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trombone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tuba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"muted trumpet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"french horn" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"brass section" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthbrass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthbrass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"soprano sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"alto sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tenor sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"baritone sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"oboe" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"english horn" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bassoon" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clarinet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"piccolo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"flute" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"recorder" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pan flute" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"blown bottle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shakuhachi" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"whistle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"ocarina" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 1 (square)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 2 (sawtooth)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 3 (calliope)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 4 (chiff)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 5 (charang)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 6 (voice)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 7 (fifths)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 8 (bass+lead)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 1 (new age)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 2 (warm)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 3 (polysynth)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 4 (choir)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 5 (bowed)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 6 (metallic)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 7 (halo)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 8 (sweep)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 1 (rain)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 2 (soundtrack)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 3 (crystal)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 4 (atmosphere)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 5 (brightness)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 6 (goblins)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 7 (echoes)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 8 (sci-fi)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"sitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"banjo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shamisen" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"koto" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"kalimba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bagpipe" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fiddle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shanai" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tinkle bell" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"agogo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"steel drums" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"woodblock" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"taiko drum" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"melodic tom" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth drum" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"reverse cymbal" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"guitar fret noise" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"breath noise" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"seashore" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bird tweet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"telephone ring" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"helicopter" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"applause" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"gunshot" \melodie
}
>>
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-d2f91df9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-d2f91df9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="fine-tuning-pedal-brackets.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Fine-tuning pedal brackets</h3>
<p>For fine-tuning the appearance of a pedal bracket, the properties
<code>edge-width</code>, <code>edge-height</code>, and <code>shorten-pair</code> of
<code>PianoPedalBracket</code> objects can be modified. For example, the
bracket may be extended to the right edge of the note head:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override Staff.PianoPedalBracket #'shorten-pair = #'(0 . -1.0)
c4\sostenutoOn d e c,
f4 g a2\sostenutoOff
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="38/lily-ae6927a2.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="38/lily-ae6927a2.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="indicating-cross-staff-chords-with-arpeggio-bracket.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Indicating cross-staff chords with arpeggio bracket</h3>
<p>An arpeggio bracket can indicate that notes on two different staves are
to be played with the same hand. In order to do this, the
<code>PianoStaff</code> must be set to accept cross-staff arpeggios and the
arpeggios must be set to the bracket shape in the <code>PianoStaff</code>
context.
<p>(Debussy, Les collines d’Anacapri, m. 65)
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper { ragged-right = ##t }
\new PianoStaff <<
\set PianoStaff.connectArpeggios = ##t
\override PianoStaff.Arpeggio #'stencil = #ly:arpeggio::brew-chord-bracket
\new Staff {
\relative c' {
\key b \major
\time 6/8
b8-.(\arpeggio fis'-.\> cis-. e-. gis-. b-.)\!\fermata^\laissezVibrer
\bar "||"
}
}
\new Staff {
\relative c' {
\clef bass
\key b \major
<<
{
<a e cis>2.\arpeggio
}
\\
{
<a, e a,>2.
}
>>
}
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="aa/lily-d49b372e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="aa/lily-d49b372e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="jazz-combo-template.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Jazz combo template</h3>
<p>This is quite an advanced template, for a jazz ensemble. Note that all
instruments are notated in <code>\key c \major</code>. This refers to the
key in concert pitch; the key will be automatically transposed if the
music is within a <code>\transpose</code> section.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
title = "Song"
subtitle = "(tune)"
composer = "Me"
meter = "moderato"
piece = "Swing"
tagline = \markup {
\column {
"LilyPond example file by Amelie Zapf,"
"Berlin 07/07/2003"
}
}
}
%#(set-global-staff-size 16)
\include "english.ly"
%%%%%%%%%%%% Some macros %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
sl = {
\override NoteHead #'style = #'slash
\override Stem #'transparent = ##t
}
nsl = {
\revert NoteHead #'style
\revert Stem #'transparent
}
crOn = \override NoteHead #'style = #'cross
crOff = \revert NoteHead #'style
%% insert chord name style stuff here.
jazzChords = { }
%%%%%%%%%%%% Keys'n'thangs %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
global = { \time 4/4 }
Key = { \key c \major }
% ############ Horns ############
% ------ Trumpet ------
trpt = \transpose c d \relative c'' {
\Key
c1 | c | c |
}
trpHarmony = \transpose c' d {
\jazzChords
}
trumpet = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Trumpet"
\clef treble
<<
\trpt
>>
}
% ------ Alto Saxophone ------
alto = \transpose c a \relative c' {
\Key
c1 | c | c |
}
altoHarmony = \transpose c' a {
\jazzChords
}
altoSax = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Alto Sax"
\clef treble
<<
\alto
>>
}
% ------ Baritone Saxophone ------
bari = \transpose c a' \relative c {
\Key
c1
c1
\sl
d4^"Solo" d d d
\nsl
}
bariHarmony = \transpose c' a \chordmode {
\jazzChords s1 s d2:maj e:m7
}
bariSax = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bari Sax"
\clef treble
<<
\bari
>>
}
% ------ Trombone ------
tbone = \relative c {
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
tboneHarmony = \chordmode {
\jazzChords
}
trombone = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Trombone"
\clef bass
<<
\tbone
>>
}
% ############ Rhythm Section #############
% ------ Guitar ------
gtr = \relative c'' {
\Key
c1
\sl
b4 b b b
\nsl
c1
}
gtrHarmony = \chordmode {
\jazzChords
s1 c2:min7+ d2:maj9
}
guitar = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Guitar"
\clef treble
<<
\gtr
>>
}
%% ------ Piano ------
rhUpper = \relative c'' {
\voiceOne
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
rhLower = \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
\Key
e1 | e | e
}
lhUpper = \relative c' {
\voiceOne
\Key
g1 | g | g
}
lhLower = \relative c {
\voiceTwo
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
PianoRH = {
\clef treble
\global
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic grand"
<<
\new Voice = "one" \rhUpper
\new Voice = "two" \rhLower
>>
}
PianoLH = {
\clef bass
\global
\set Staff.midiInstrument = "acoustic grand"
<<
\new Voice = "one" \lhUpper
\new Voice = "two" \lhLower
>>
}
piano = {
<<
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"Piano"
\new Staff = "upper" \PianoRH
\new Staff = "lower" \PianoLH
>>
}
% ------ Bass Guitar ------
Bass = \relative c {
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
bass = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bass"
\clef bass
<<
\Bass
>>
}
% ------ Drums ------
up = \drummode {
\voiceOne
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
}
down = \drummode {
\voiceTwo
bd4 s bd s
bd4 s bd s
bd4 s bd s
}
drumContents = {
\global
<<
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = #"Drums"
\new DrumVoice \up
\new DrumVoice \down
>>
}
%%%%%%%%% It All Goes Together Here %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\score {
<<
\new StaffGroup = "horns" <<
\new Staff = "trumpet" \trumpet
\new Staff = "altosax" \altoSax
\new ChordNames = "barichords" \bariHarmony
\new Staff = "barisax" \bariSax
\new Staff = "trombone" \trombone
>>
\new StaffGroup = "rhythm" <<
\new ChordNames = "chords" \gtrHarmony
\new Staff = "guitar" \guitar
\new PianoStaff = "piano" \piano
\new Staff = "bass" \bass
\new DrumStaff \drumContents
>>
>>
\layout {
\context { \RemoveEmptyStaffContext }
\context {
\Score
\override BarNumber #'padding = #3
\override RehearsalMark #'padding = #2
skipBars = ##t
}
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ea/lily-36b7ad93.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ea/lily-36b7ad93.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="laissez-vibrer-ties.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Laissez vibrer ties</h3>
<p>Laissez vibrer ties have a fixed size. Their formatting can be tuned
using <code>'tie-configuration</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<c e g>4\laissezVibrer r <c f g>\laissezVibrer r
<c d f g>4\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4.\laissezVibrer r8
<c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r
\override LaissezVibrerTieColumn #'tie-configuration
= #`((-7 . ,DOWN)
(-5 . ,DOWN)
(-3 . ,UP)
(-1 . ,UP))
<c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="fd/lily-61b8d987.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="fd/lily-61b8d987.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-simple.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template (simple)</h3>
<p>Here is a simple piano staff with some notes.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"Piano "
\new Staff = "upper" \upper
\new Staff = "lower" \lower
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="33/lily-72cc9456.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="33/lily-72cc9456.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-centered-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with centered dynamics</h3>
<p>Many piano scores have the dynamics centered between the two staves.
This requires a bit of tweaking to implement, but since the template is
right here, you don't have to do the tweaking yourself.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
dynamics = {
s2\fff\> s4 s\!\pp
}
pedal = {
s2\sustainOn s\sustainOff
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" \upper
\new Dynamics = "dynamics" \dynamics
\new Staff = "lower" <<
\clef bass
\lower
>>
\new Dynamics = "pedal" \pedal
>>
\layout {
\context {
\type "Engraver_group"
\name Dynamics
% So that \cresc works, for example.
\alias Voice
\consists "Output_property_engraver"
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1 . 1)
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'Y-offset = #0
pedalSustainStrings = #'("Ped." "*Ped." "*")
pedalUnaCordaStrings = #'("una corda" "" "tre corde")
\consists "Piano_pedal_engraver"
\consists "Script_engraver"
\consists "Dynamic_engraver"
\consists "Text_engraver"
\override TextScript #'font-size = #2
\override TextScript #'font-shape = #'italic
\consists "Skip_event_swallow_translator"
\consists "Axis_group_engraver"
}
\context {
\PianoStaff
\accepts Dynamics
}
}
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" << \upper \dynamics \pedal >>
\new Staff = "lower" << \lower \dynamics \pedal >>
>>
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="81/lily-165c7953.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="81/lily-165c7953.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-centered-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with centered lyrics</h3>
<p>Instead of having a full staff for the melody and lyrics, lyrics can be
centered between the staves of a piano staff.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
\score {
\new GrandStaff <<
\new Staff = upper { \new Voice = "singer" \upper }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "singer" \text
\new Staff = lower { \lower }
>>
\layout {
\context {
\GrandStaff
\accepts "Lyrics"
}
\context {
\Lyrics
\consists "Bar_engraver"
}
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="37/lily-c18abd8d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="37/lily-c18abd8d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-melody-and-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with melody and lyrics</h3>
<p>Here is a typical song format: one staff with the melody and lyrics,
with piano accompaniment underneath.
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a b c d
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
\score {
<<
\new Voice = "mel" { \autoBeamOff \melody }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto mel \text
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" \upper
\new Staff = "lower" \lower
>>
>>
\layout {
\context { \RemoveEmptyStaffContext }
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="68/lily-e6876100.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="68/lily-e6876100.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template-with-automatic-piano-reduction.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template with automatic piano reduction</h3>
<p>This template adds an automatic piano reduction to the standard SATB
vocal score demonstrated in "Vocal ensemble template". This
demonstrates one of the strengths of LilyPond – you can use a music
definition more than once. If any changes are made to the vocal notes
(say, <code>tenorMusic</code>), then the changes will also apply to the piano
reduction.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords =\lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
<<
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Lyrics = sopranos { s1 }
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = sopranos { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> }
\new Voice = altos { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics = altos { s1 }
\new Lyrics = tenors { s1 }
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = tenors { \voiceOne <<\global \tenorMusic >> }
\new Voice = basses { \voiceTwo <<\global \bassMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics = basses { s1 }
\context Lyrics = sopranos \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\context Lyrics = altos \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\context Lyrics = tenors \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\context Lyrics = basses \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff <<
\set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f
\partcombine
<< \global \sopMusic >>
<< \global \altoMusic >>
>>
\new Staff <<
\clef bass
\set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f
\partcombine
<< \global \tenorMusic >>
<< \global \bassMusic >>
>>
>>
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="99/lily-1164d362.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="99/lily-1164d362.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Percussion"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Percussion</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Percussion">Percussion</a>.
<p><a name="adding-drum-parts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding drum parts</h3>
<p>Using the powerful pre-configured tools such as the <code>\drummode</code>
function and the <code>DrumStaff</code> context, inputting drum parts is
quite easy: drums are placed at their own staff positions (with a
special clef symbol) and have note heads according to the drum.
Attaching an extra symbol to the drum or restricting the number of
lines is possible.
<pre class="verbatim">
drh = \drummode { cymc4.^"crash" hhc16^"h.h." hh hhc8 hho hhc8 hh16 hh hhc4 r4 r2 }
drl = \drummode { bd4 sn8 bd bd4 << bd ss >> bd8 tommh tommh bd toml toml bd tomfh16 tomfh }
timb = \drummode { timh4 ssh timl8 ssh r timh r4 ssh8 timl r4 cb8 cb }
\score {
<<
\new DrumStaff \with {
drumStyleTable = #timbales-style
\override StaffSymbol #'line-count = #2
\override BarLine #'bar-size = #2
} <<
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"timbales"
\timb
>>
\new DrumStaff <<
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"drums"
\new DrumVoice { \stemUp \drh }
\new DrumVoice { \stemDown \drl }
>>
>>
\layout { }
\midi {
\context {
\Score
tempoWholesPerMinute = #(ly:make-moment 120 4)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2e/lily-5b0f4aab.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2e/lily-5b0f4aab.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="heavily-customized-polymetric-time-signatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Heavily customized polymetric time signatures</h3>
<p>Though the polymetric time signature shown was not the most essential
item here, it has been included to show the beat of this piece (which
is the template of a real Balkan song!).
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define (set-time-signature one two three four five six seven eight nine ten
eleven num)
(markup #:override '(baseline-skip . 0) #:number
(#:line ((#:column (one num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (two num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (three num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (four num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (five num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (six num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (seven num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (eight num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (nine num)) #:vcenter "+" (#:column (ten num))
#:vcenter "+" (#:column (eleven num))))
))
melody = \relative c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bb Sop."
\key g \major
\time 25/8
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = #ly:text-interface::print
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'text = #(set-time-signature "3" "2" "2" "3"
"2" "2" "2" "2" "3" "2" "2" "8" )
\set Staff.beatGrouping = #'(3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 3 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 5 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 7 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 10 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 12 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 14 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 16 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 18 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 21 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 25 8) 23 8)
c8 c c d4 c8 c b c b a4 g fis8 e d c b' c d e4-^ fis8 g \break
c,4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4
c4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4 \break
c4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4
c4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4 \break
}
drum = \new DrumStaff \drummode {
\bar "|:" bd4.^\markup { "Drums" } sn4 bd \bar ":" sn4.
bd4 sn \bar ":" bd sn bd4. sn4 bd \bar ":|"
}
{
\melody
\drum
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="24/lily-302b7020.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="24/lily-302b7020.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="jazz-combo-template.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Jazz combo template</h3>
<p>This is quite an advanced template, for a jazz ensemble. Note that all
instruments are notated in <code>\key c \major</code>. This refers to the
key in concert pitch; the key will be automatically transposed if the
music is within a <code>\transpose</code> section.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
title = "Song"
subtitle = "(tune)"
composer = "Me"
meter = "moderato"
piece = "Swing"
tagline = \markup {
\column {
"LilyPond example file by Amelie Zapf,"
"Berlin 07/07/2003"
}
}
}
%#(set-global-staff-size 16)
\include "english.ly"
%%%%%%%%%%%% Some macros %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
sl = {
\override NoteHead #'style = #'slash
\override Stem #'transparent = ##t
}
nsl = {
\revert NoteHead #'style
\revert Stem #'transparent
}
crOn = \override NoteHead #'style = #'cross
crOff = \revert NoteHead #'style
%% insert chord name style stuff here.
jazzChords = { }
%%%%%%%%%%%% Keys'n'thangs %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
global = { \time 4/4 }
Key = { \key c \major }
% ############ Horns ############
% ------ Trumpet ------
trpt = \transpose c d \relative c'' {
\Key
c1 | c | c |
}
trpHarmony = \transpose c' d {
\jazzChords
}
trumpet = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Trumpet"
\clef treble
<<
\trpt
>>
}
% ------ Alto Saxophone ------
alto = \transpose c a \relative c' {
\Key
c1 | c | c |
}
altoHarmony = \transpose c' a {
\jazzChords
}
altoSax = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Alto Sax"
\clef treble
<<
\alto
>>
}
% ------ Baritone Saxophone ------
bari = \transpose c a' \relative c {
\Key
c1
c1
\sl
d4^"Solo" d d d
\nsl
}
bariHarmony = \transpose c' a \chordmode {
\jazzChords s1 s d2:maj e:m7
}
bariSax = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bari Sax"
\clef treble
<<
\bari
>>
}
% ------ Trombone ------
tbone = \relative c {
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
tboneHarmony = \chordmode {
\jazzChords
}
trombone = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Trombone"
\clef bass
<<
\tbone
>>
}
% ############ Rhythm Section #############
% ------ Guitar ------
gtr = \relative c'' {
\Key
c1
\sl
b4 b b b
\nsl
c1
}
gtrHarmony = \chordmode {
\jazzChords
s1 c2:min7+ d2:maj9
}
guitar = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Guitar"
\clef treble
<<
\gtr
>>
}
%% ------ Piano ------
rhUpper = \relative c'' {
\voiceOne
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
rhLower = \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
\Key
e1 | e | e
}
lhUpper = \relative c' {
\voiceOne
\Key
g1 | g | g
}
lhLower = \relative c {
\voiceTwo
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
PianoRH = {
\clef treble
\global
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic grand"
<<
\new Voice = "one" \rhUpper
\new Voice = "two" \rhLower
>>
}
PianoLH = {
\clef bass
\global
\set Staff.midiInstrument = "acoustic grand"
<<
\new Voice = "one" \lhUpper
\new Voice = "two" \lhLower
>>
}
piano = {
<<
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"Piano"
\new Staff = "upper" \PianoRH
\new Staff = "lower" \PianoLH
>>
}
% ------ Bass Guitar ------
Bass = \relative c {
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
bass = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bass"
\clef bass
<<
\Bass
>>
}
% ------ Drums ------
up = \drummode {
\voiceOne
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
}
down = \drummode {
\voiceTwo
bd4 s bd s
bd4 s bd s
bd4 s bd s
}
drumContents = {
\global
<<
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = #"Drums"
\new DrumVoice \up
\new DrumVoice \down
>>
}
%%%%%%%%% It All Goes Together Here %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\score {
<<
\new StaffGroup = "horns" <<
\new Staff = "trumpet" \trumpet
\new Staff = "altosax" \altoSax
\new ChordNames = "barichords" \bariHarmony
\new Staff = "barisax" \bariSax
\new Staff = "trombone" \trombone
>>
\new StaffGroup = "rhythm" <<
\new ChordNames = "chords" \gtrHarmony
\new Staff = "guitar" \guitar
\new PianoStaff = "piano" \piano
\new Staff = "bass" \bass
\new DrumStaff \drumContents
>>
>>
\layout {
\context { \RemoveEmptyStaffContext }
\context {
\Score
\override BarNumber #'padding = #3
\override RehearsalMark #'padding = #2
skipBars = ##t
}
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ea/lily-36b7ad93.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ea/lily-36b7ad93.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="percussion-beaters.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Percussion beaters</h3>
<p>Graphic symbols for percussion instruments are not natively supported;
however it is possible to include such symbols, either as an external
EPS file or as embedded PostScript code inside a markup, as
demonstrated in this example.
<pre class="verbatim">
stick = \markup {
\with-dimensions #'(0 . 5) #'(0 . 5)
\postscript #"
0 6 translate
0.8 -0.8 scale
0 0 0 setrgbcolor
[] 0 setdash
1 setlinewidth
0 setlinejoin
0 setlinecap
gsave [1 0 0 1 0 0] concat
gsave [1 0 0 1 -3.5406095 -199.29342] concat
gsave
0 0 0 setrgbcolor
newpath
7.1434065 200.94354 moveto
7.2109628 200.90454 7.2785188 200.86554 7.3460747 200.82654 curveto
8.2056347 202.31535 9.0651946 203.80414 9.9247546 205.29295 curveto
9.8571989 205.33195 9.7896429 205.37095 9.7220864 205.40996 curveto
8.8625264 203.92115 8.0029664 202.43233 7.1434065 200.94354 curveto
closepath
eofill
grestore
gsave
0 0 0 setrgbcolor
newpath
4.9646672 203.10444 moveto
5.0036707 203.03688 5.0426744 202.96933 5.0816777 202.90176 curveto
6.5704792 203.76133 8.0592809 204.6209 9.5480824 205.48045 curveto
9.5090791 205.54801 9.4700754 205.61556 9.4310717 205.68311 curveto
7.94227 204.82356 6.4534687 203.96399 4.9646672 203.10444 curveto
closepath
eofill
grestore
gsave
<<
/ShadingType 3
/ColorSpace /DeviceRGB
/Coords [113.13708 207.87465 0 113.13708 207.87465 16.162441]
/Extend [true true]
/Domain [0 1]
/Function <<
/FunctionType 3
/Functions
[
<<
/FunctionType 2
/Domain [0 1]
/C0 [1 1 1]
/C1 [0.72941178 0.72941178 0.72941178]
/N 1
>>
]
/Domain [0 1]
/Bounds [ ]
/Encode [ 0 1 ]
>>
>>
newpath
7.6422017 200.76488 moveto
7.6505696 201.02554 7.3905363 201.24867 7.1341335 201.20075 curveto
6.8759501 201.16916 6.6949602 200.87978 6.7801462 200.63381 curveto
6.8480773 200.39155 7.1438307 200.25377 7.3728389 200.35861 curveto
7.5332399 200.42458 7.6444521 200.59122 7.6422017 200.76488 curveto
closepath
clip
gsave [0.052859054 0.063089841 -0.020912282 0.017521108 5.7334261 189.76443] concat
shfill
grestore
grestore
0 0 0 setrgbcolor
[] 0 setdash
0.027282091 setlinewidth
0 setlinejoin
0 setlinecap
newpath
7.6422017 200.76488 moveto
7.6505696 201.02554 7.3905363 201.24867 7.1341335 201.20075 curveto
6.8759501 201.16916 6.6949602 200.87978 6.7801462 200.63381 curveto
6.8480773 200.39155 7.1438307 200.25377 7.3728389 200.35861 curveto
7.5332399 200.42458 7.6444521 200.59122 7.6422017 200.76488 curveto
closepath
stroke
gsave
<<
/ShadingType 3
/ColorSpace /DeviceRGB
/Coords [113.13708 207.87465 0 113.13708 207.87465 16.162441]
/Extend [true true]
/Domain [0 1]
/Function <<
/FunctionType 3
/Functions
[
<<
/FunctionType 2
/Domain [0 1]
/C0 [1 1 1]
/C1 [0.72941178 0.72941178 0.72941178]
/N 1
>>
]
/Domain [0 1]
/Bounds [ ]
/Encode [ 0 1 ]
>>
>>
newpath
5.2721217 202.83181 moveto
5.2804896 203.09247 5.0204563 203.3156 4.7640539 203.26768 curveto
4.5058701 203.23609 4.3248803 202.94671 4.4100662 202.70074 curveto
4.4779975 202.45848 4.7737511 202.3207 5.0027593 202.42554 curveto
5.1631598 202.49149 5.2743721 202.65813 5.2721217 202.83181 curveto
closepath
clip
gsave [0.052859054 0.063089841 -0.020912282 0.017521108 3.363346 191.83136] concat
shfill
grestore
grestore
0 0 0 setrgbcolor
[] 0 setdash
0.027282091 setlinewidth
0 setlinejoin
0 setlinecap
newpath
5.2721217 202.83181 moveto
5.2804896 203.09247 5.0204563 203.3156 4.7640539 203.26768 curveto
4.5058701 203.23609 4.3248803 202.94671 4.4100662 202.70074 curveto
4.4779975 202.45848 4.7737511 202.3207 5.0027593 202.42554 curveto
5.1631598 202.49149 5.2743721 202.65813 5.2721217 202.83181 curveto
closepath
stroke
grestore
grestore
"
}
\score {
b1^\stick
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ba/lily-f2064e91.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ba/lily-f2064e91.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-music-with-different-time-signatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing music with different time signatures</h3>
<p>In the following snippet, two parts have a completely different time
signature, yet remain synchronized. The bar lines can no longer be
printed at the <code>Score</code> level; to allow independent bar lines in
each part, the <code>Barline_engraver</code> is moved from the <code>Score</code>
context to the <code>Staff</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
indent = #0
ragged-right = ##t
}
global = { \time 3/4 { s2.*3 } \bar "" \break { s2.*3 } }
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Timing_translator"
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Default_bar_line_engraver"
\override SpacingSpanner #'uniform-stretching = ##t
\override SpacingSpanner #'strict-note-spacing = ##t
proportionalNotationDuration = #(ly:make-moment 1 64)
}
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Timing_translator"
\consists "Default_bar_line_engraver"
\consists "Time_signature_engraver"
}
\context {
\Voice
\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
tupletFullLength = ##t
}
}
Bassklarinette = \new Staff <<
\global {
\bar "|"
\clef treble
\time 3/8
d''4.
\bar "|"
\time 3/4
r8 des''2( c''8)
\bar "|"
\time 7/8
r4. ees''2 ~
\bar "|"
\time 2/4
\tupletUp
\times 2/3 { ees''4 r4 d''4 ~ }
\bar "|"
\time 3/8
\tupletUp
\times 3/4 { d''4 r4 }
\bar "|"
\time 2/4
e''2
\bar "|"
\time 3/8
es''4.
\bar "|"
\time 3/4
r8 d''2 r8
\bar "|"
}
>>
Perkussion = \new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff <<
\global {
\bar "|"
\clef percussion
\time 3/4
r4 c'2 ~
\bar "|"
c'2.
\bar "|"
R2.
\bar "|"
r2 g'4 ~
\bar "|"
g'2. ~
\bar "|"
g'2.
}
>>
\new Staff <<
\global {
\bar "|"
\clef percussion
\time 3/4
R2.
\bar "|"
g'2. ~
\bar "|"
g'2.
\bar "|"
r4 g'2 ~
\bar "|"
g'2 r4
\bar "|"
g'2.
}
>>
>>
\score {
<< \Bassklarinette \Perkussion >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="46/lily-ccd9189a.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="46/lily-ccd9189a.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Fretted-strings"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Fretted strings</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Fretted-string-instruments">Fretted string instruments</a>.
<p><a name="adding-fingerings-to-a-score.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding fingerings to a score</h3>
<p>Fingering instructions can be entered using a simple syntax.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
c4-1 d-2 f-4 e-3
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c8/lily-da20b121.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c8/lily-da20b121.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding fingerings to tablatures</h3>
<p>To add fingerings to tablatures, use a combination of <code>\markup</code>
and <code>\finger</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
one = \markup { \finger 1 }
two = \markup { \finger 2 }
threeTwo = \markup {
\override #'(baseline-skip . 2)
\column {
\finger 3
\finger 2
}
}
threeFour = \markup {
\override #'(baseline-skip . 2)
\column {
\finger 3
\finger 4
}
}
\score {
\new TabStaff {
\stemUp
e8\4^\one b\2 <e, g\3 e'\1>^>[ b\2 e\4]
<a\3 fis'\1>^>^\threeTwo[ b\2 e\4]
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="10/lily-8706a1a6.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="10/lily-8706a1a6.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="allowing-fingerings-to-be-printed-inside-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Allowing fingerings to be printed inside the staff</h3>
<p>By default, fingering numbers will be printed outside the staff.
However, this behavior can be canceled.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
\once \override Fingering #'staff-padding = #'()
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="51/lily-3f70c2ad.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="51/lily-3f70c2ad.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="controlling-the-placement-of-chord-fingerings.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Controlling the placement of chord fingerings</h3>
<p>The placement of fingering numbers can be controlled precisely.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(right)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>2
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up right down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="de/lily-34875599.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="de/lily-34875599.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="customizing-fretboard-fret-diagrams.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Customizing fretboard fret diagrams</h3>
<p>Fret diagram properties can be set through
<code>fret-diagram-details</code>. For FretBoard fret diagrams,
overrides are applied to the <code>FretBoards.FretBoard</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode { c' }
#guitar-tuning
#"x;1-1-(;3-2;3-3;3-4;1-1-);"
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode { c1 c c d }
}
\context FretBoards {
% Set global properties of fret diagram
\override FretBoards.FretBoard #'size = #'1.2
\override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'finger-code = #'in-dot
\override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-color = #'white
\chordmode {
c
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'size = #'1.0
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'barre-type = #'straight
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-color = #'black
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'finger-code = #'below-string
c'
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'barre-type = #'none
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'number-type = #'arabic
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'orientation = #'landscape
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'mute-string = #"M"
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'label-dir = #-1
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-color = #'black
c'
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'finger-code = #'below-string
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-radius = #0.35
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-position = #0.5
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'fret-count = #3
d
}
}
\context Voice {
c'1 c' c' d'
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="25/lily-db5de719.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="25/lily-db5de719.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="customizing-markup-fret-diagrams.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Customizing markup fret diagrams</h3>
<p>Fret diagram properties can be set through
<code>fret-diagram-details</code>. For markup fret diagrams, overrides
can be applied to the <code>Voice.TextScript</code> object or directly
to the markup.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\chords { c1 c c d }
\new Voice = "mel" {
\textLengthOn
% Set global properties of fret diagram
\override Voice.TextScript #'size = #'1.2
\override Voice.TextScript #'fret-diagram-details
#'finger-code = #'in-dot
\override Voice.TextScript #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-color = #'white
%% C major for guitar, no barre, using defaults
% terse style
c'1^\markup { \fret-diagram-terse #"x;3-3;2-2;o;1-1;o;" }
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
% size 1.0
% roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre
c'1^\markup {
% standard size
\override #'(size . 1.0) {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(number-type . roman-lower)
(finger-code . in-dot)
(barre-type . straight))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
}
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
% landscape orientation, arabic numbers, M for mute string
% no barre, fret label down or left, small mute label font
c'1^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(finger-code . below-string)
(number-type . arabic)
(label-dir . -1)
(mute-string . "M")
(orientation . landscape)
(barre-type . none)
(xo-font-magnification . 0.4)
(xo-padding . 0.3))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
%% simple D chord
% terse style
% larger dots, centered dots, fewer frets
% label below string
d'1^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(finger-code . below-string)
(dot-radius . 0.35)
(dot-position . 0.5)
(fret-count . 3))) {
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;"
}
}
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b0/lily-97afdcd2.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b0/lily-97afdcd2.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="faking-a-hammer-in-tablatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Faking a hammer in tablatures</h3>
<p>A hammer in tablature can be faked with slurs.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new TabStaff {
\relative c'' {
c4( d) d( d)
d2( c)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a3/lily-b42f6b20.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a3/lily-b42f6b20.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="fingerings,-string-indications,-and-right-hand-fingerings.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Fingerings, string indications, and right-hand fingerings</h3>
<p>This example combines left-hand fingering, string indications, and
right-hand fingering.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define RH rightHandFinger)
\relative c {
\clef "treble_8"
<c-3\5-\RH #1 >4
<e-2\4-\RH #2 >4
<g-0\3-\RH #3 >4
<c-1\2-\RH #4 >4
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b8/lily-c4d886c0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b8/lily-c4d886c0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="flamenco-notation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Flamenco notation</h3>
<p>For flamenco guitar, special notation is used:
<p>* a golpe symbol to indicate a slap on the guitar body with the nail of
the ring finger
<p>* an arrow to indicate (the direction of) strokes
<p>* different letters for fingering ("p": thumb, "i": index finger,
"m": middle finger, "a": ring finger and "x": little finger)
<p>* 3- and 4-finger rasgueados; stroke upwards with all fingers, ending
with an up- and down using the index finger
<p>* abanicos: strokes (in tuples) with thumb (down), little and index
finger (both up). There's also an abanico 2 where middle and ring
finger are used instead of the little finger.
<p>* alza pua: fast playing with the thumb
<p>Most figures use arrows in combination with fingering; with abanicos
and rasgueados, noteheads are printed only for the first chord.
<p>This snippet contains some header-like code that can be copied as
‘<samp><span class="samp">flamenco.ly</span></samp>’ and included in source files.
<pre class="verbatim">
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%% Cut here ----- Start 'flamenco.ly'
% Text indicators
abanico = \markup { \italic Abanico }
rasgueaso = \markup { \italic Ras. }
alzapua = \markup { \italic Alzapua }
% Finger stroke symbols
strokeUp = \markup { \postscript #"
0.1 setlinewidth
0.5 0 moveto
0.5 2 lineto
0.2 1.4 lineto
0.5 2 moveto
0.8 1.4 lineto
stroke
"}
strokeDown = \markup { \postscript #"
0.1 setlinewidth
0.5 2 moveto
0.5 0 lineto
0.2 0.6 lineto
0.5 0 moveto
0.8 0.6 lineto
stroke
"}
% Golpe symbol
golpe = \markup { \postscript #"
0.2 setlinewidth
0 0 moveto
1 0 lineto
1 1 lineto
stroke
"\postscript #"
0.1 setlinewidth
-0.6 -0.1 moveto
-0.6 1.0 lineto
0.5 1.0 lineto
stroke
"}
strokeUpGolpe = \markup { \column { \golpe \line { \strokeUp }}}
iUpGolpe = \markup { \column { \golpe \line { \small i } \line { \strokeUp }}}
% Strokes for all fingers
pUp = \markup { \column { \small p \line { \strokeUp }}}
pDown = \markup { \column { \small p \line { \strokeDown }}}
iUp = \markup { \column { \small i \line { \strokeUp }}}
iDown = \markup { \column { \small i \line { \strokeDown }}}
mUp = \markup { \column { \small m \line { \strokeUp }}}
mDown = \markup { \column { \small m \line { \strokeDown }}}
aUp = \markup { \column { \small a \line { \strokeUp }}}
aDown = \markup { \column { \small a \line { \strokeDown }}}
xUp = \markup { \column { \small x \line { \strokeUp }}}
xDown = \markup { \column { \small x \line { \strokeDown }}}
% Just handy :)
tupletOff = {
\once \override TupletNumber #'stencil = ##f
\once \override TupletBracket #'stencil = ##f
}
tupletsOff = {
\override TupletNumber #'stencil = ##f
\override TupletBracket #'bracket-visibility = #'if-no-beam
}
tupletsOn = {
\override TupletBracket #'bracket-visibility = #'default
\revert TupletNumber #'stencil
}
headsOff = {
\override TabNoteHead #'transparent = ##t
\override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
\override NoteHead #'no-ledgers = ##t
}
headsOn = {
\override TabNoteHead #'transparent = ##f
\override NoteHead #'transparent = ##f
\override NoteHead #'no-ledgers = ##f
}
%%%%%%% Cut here ----- End 'flamenco.ly'
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
part = \relative c' {
<a, e' a cis e>8^\iUp
<a e' a cis e>8^\iDown
r4
r2^\golpe
<a e' a cis e>8^\iUp
<a e' a cis e>8^\iDown
<a e' a cis e>8^\iUpGolpe
<a e' a cis e>8^\iDown
r2
<a e' a cis e>16^\aUp
\headsOff
<a e' a cis e>^\mUp
<a e' a cis e>^\iUp
<a e' a cis e>^\iDown~
\headsOn
<a e' a cis e>2
r4
\tupletOff
\times 4/5 {
<a e' a cis e>16^\xUp
\headsOff
<a e' a cis e>^\aUp
<a e' a cis e>^\mUp
<a e' a cis e>^\iUp
<a e' a cis e>^\iDown~
\headsOn
}
<a e' a cis e>2
r4
\tupletsOff
\times 2/3 {
<a e' a cis e>8^\pDown
\headsOff
<a e' a cis e>^\xUp
<a e' a cis e>^\iUp
\headsOn
}
\times 2/3 {
<a e' a cis e>8^\pDown
\headsOff
<a e' a cis e>^\xUp
<a e' a cis e>^\iUp
\headsOn
}
\times 2/3 {
<a e' a cis e>8^\pDown
\headsOff
<a e' a cis e>^\xUp
<a e' a cis e>^\iUp
\headsOn
}
\times 2/3 {
<a e' a cis e>8^\pDown
\headsOff
<a e' a cis e>^\xUp
<a e' a cis e>^\iUp
\headsOn
}
\tupletsOff
\override Beam #'positions = #'(2 . 2)
\times 2/3 {
a8^\markup{ \small p }
<e' a>^\strokeUpGolpe
<e a>^\strokeDown
}
\times 2/3 {
a,8^\markup{ \small p }
<e' a>^\strokeUpGolpe
<e a>^\strokeDown
}
\times 2/3 {
a,8^\markup{ \small p }
<e' a>^\strokeUpGolpe
<e a>^\strokeDown
}
\times 2/3 {
a,8^\markup{ \small p }
<e' a>^\strokeUpGolpe
<e a>^\strokeDown
}
\tupletsOn
\once \override TextScript #'extra-offset = #'(0 . -1)
<g, b f'>1_\golpe^\mUp
\bar "|."
}
\score {
\new StaffGroup <<
\context Staff = "part" <<
\clef G
\transpose c c'
{
\part
}
>>
\context TabStaff {
\part
}
>>
\layout {
ragged-right = ##t
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c3/lily-867b8c3f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c3/lily-867b8c3f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="fret-diagrams-explained-and-developed.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Fret diagrams explained and developed</h3>
<p>This snippet shows many possibilities for obtaining
and tweaking fret diagrams.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\chords {
a2 a
c2 c
d1
}
\new Voice = "mel" {
\textLengthOn
% Set global properties of fret diagram
\override Voice.TextScript #'size = #1.2
\override Voice.TextScript #'fret-diagram-details #'finger-code = #'below-string
\override Voice.TextScript #'fret-diagram-details #'dot-color = #'black
%% A chord for ukelele
a'2^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(string-count . 4)
(dot-color . white)
(finger-code . in-dot))) {
\fret-diagram #"4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;"
}
}
%% A chord for ukelele, with formatting defined in definition string
% 1.2 * size, 4 strings, 4 frets, fingerings below string
% dot radius .35 of fret spacing, dot position 0.55 of fret spacing
a'2^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(dot-color . white)
(open-string . "o"))) {
\fret-diagram #"s:1.2;w:4;h:3;f:2;d:0.35;p:0.55;4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;"
}
}
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
% roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre
c'2^\markup {
% 110% of default size
\override #'(size . 1.1) {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(number-type . roman-lower)
(finger-code . below-string)
(barre-type . straight))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
}
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
c'2^\markup {
% 110% of default size
\override #'(size . 1.1) {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(number-type . arabic)
(dot-label-font-mag . 0.9)
(finger-code . in-dot)
(fret-label-font-mag . 0.6)
(fret-label-vertical-offset . 0)
(label-dir . -1)
(mute-string . "M")
(orientation . landscape)
(xo-font-magnification . 0.4)
(xo-padding . 0.3))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
}
%% simple D chord
d'1^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(finger-code . below-string)
(dot-radius . 0.35)
(dot-position . 0.5)
(fret-count . 3))) {
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;"
}
}
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a3/lily-807ee76a.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a3/lily-807ee76a.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="how-to-change-fret-diagram-position.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">How to change fret diagram position</h3>
<p>If you want to move the position of a fret diagram, for example, to
avoid collision, or to place it between two notes, you have various
possibilities:
<p>1) modify #'padding or #'extra-offset values (as shown in the first
snippet)
<p>2) you can add an invisible voice and attach the fret diagrams to the
invisible notes in that voice (as shown in the second example).
<p>If you need to move the fret according with a rythmic position inside
the bar (in the example, the third beat of the measure) the second
example is better, because the fret is aligned with the third beat
itself.
<pre class="verbatim">
harmonies = \chordmode
{
a8:13
% THE FOLLOWING IS THE COMMAND TO MOVE THE CHORD NAME
\once \override ChordNames.ChordName #'extra-offset = #'(10 . 0)
b8:13 s2.
% THIS LINE IS THE SECOND METHOD
s4 s4 b4:13
}
\score
{
<<
\context ChordNames \harmonies
\context Staff
{a8^\markup { \fret-diagram #"6-x;5-0;4-2;3-0;2-0;1-2;" }
% THE FOLLOWING IS THE COMMAND TO MOVE THE FRET DIAGRAM
\once \override TextScript #'extra-offset = #'(10 . 0)
b4.~^\markup { \fret-diagram #"6-x;5-2;4-4;3-2;2-2;1-4;" } b4. a8\break
% HERE IS THE SECOND METHOD
<<
{ a8 b4.~ b4. a8}
{ s4 s4 s4^\markup { \fret-diagram #"6-x;5-2;4-4;3-2;2-2;1-4;" }
}
>>
}
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e8/lily-3ffb84ab.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e8/lily-3ffb84ab.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="jazz-combo-template.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Jazz combo template</h3>
<p>This is quite an advanced template, for a jazz ensemble. Note that all
instruments are notated in <code>\key c \major</code>. This refers to the
key in concert pitch; the key will be automatically transposed if the
music is within a <code>\transpose</code> section.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
title = "Song"
subtitle = "(tune)"
composer = "Me"
meter = "moderato"
piece = "Swing"
tagline = \markup {
\column {
"LilyPond example file by Amelie Zapf,"
"Berlin 07/07/2003"
}
}
}
%#(set-global-staff-size 16)
\include "english.ly"
%%%%%%%%%%%% Some macros %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
sl = {
\override NoteHead #'style = #'slash
\override Stem #'transparent = ##t
}
nsl = {
\revert NoteHead #'style
\revert Stem #'transparent
}
crOn = \override NoteHead #'style = #'cross
crOff = \revert NoteHead #'style
%% insert chord name style stuff here.
jazzChords = { }
%%%%%%%%%%%% Keys'n'thangs %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
global = { \time 4/4 }
Key = { \key c \major }
% ############ Horns ############
% ------ Trumpet ------
trpt = \transpose c d \relative c'' {
\Key
c1 | c | c |
}
trpHarmony = \transpose c' d {
\jazzChords
}
trumpet = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Trumpet"
\clef treble
<<
\trpt
>>
}
% ------ Alto Saxophone ------
alto = \transpose c a \relative c' {
\Key
c1 | c | c |
}
altoHarmony = \transpose c' a {
\jazzChords
}
altoSax = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Alto Sax"
\clef treble
<<
\alto
>>
}
% ------ Baritone Saxophone ------
bari = \transpose c a' \relative c {
\Key
c1
c1
\sl
d4^"Solo" d d d
\nsl
}
bariHarmony = \transpose c' a \chordmode {
\jazzChords s1 s d2:maj e:m7
}
bariSax = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bari Sax"
\clef treble
<<
\bari
>>
}
% ------ Trombone ------
tbone = \relative c {
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
tboneHarmony = \chordmode {
\jazzChords
}
trombone = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Trombone"
\clef bass
<<
\tbone
>>
}
% ############ Rhythm Section #############
% ------ Guitar ------
gtr = \relative c'' {
\Key
c1
\sl
b4 b b b
\nsl
c1
}
gtrHarmony = \chordmode {
\jazzChords
s1 c2:min7+ d2:maj9
}
guitar = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Guitar"
\clef treble
<<
\gtr
>>
}
%% ------ Piano ------
rhUpper = \relative c'' {
\voiceOne
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
rhLower = \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
\Key
e1 | e | e
}
lhUpper = \relative c' {
\voiceOne
\Key
g1 | g | g
}
lhLower = \relative c {
\voiceTwo
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
PianoRH = {
\clef treble
\global
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic grand"
<<
\new Voice = "one" \rhUpper
\new Voice = "two" \rhLower
>>
}
PianoLH = {
\clef bass
\global
\set Staff.midiInstrument = "acoustic grand"
<<
\new Voice = "one" \lhUpper
\new Voice = "two" \lhLower
>>
}
piano = {
<<
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"Piano"
\new Staff = "upper" \PianoRH
\new Staff = "lower" \PianoLH
>>
}
% ------ Bass Guitar ------
Bass = \relative c {
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
bass = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bass"
\clef bass
<<
\Bass
>>
}
% ------ Drums ------
up = \drummode {
\voiceOne
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
}
down = \drummode {
\voiceTwo
bd4 s bd s
bd4 s bd s
bd4 s bd s
}
drumContents = {
\global
<<
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = #"Drums"
\new DrumVoice \up
\new DrumVoice \down
>>
}
%%%%%%%%% It All Goes Together Here %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\score {
<<
\new StaffGroup = "horns" <<
\new Staff = "trumpet" \trumpet
\new Staff = "altosax" \altoSax
\new ChordNames = "barichords" \bariHarmony
\new Staff = "barisax" \bariSax
\new Staff = "trombone" \trombone
>>
\new StaffGroup = "rhythm" <<
\new ChordNames = "chords" \gtrHarmony
\new Staff = "guitar" \guitar
\new PianoStaff = "piano" \piano
\new Staff = "bass" \bass
\new DrumStaff \drumContents
>>
>>
\layout {
\context { \RemoveEmptyStaffContext }
\context {
\Score
\override BarNumber #'padding = #3
\override RehearsalMark #'padding = #2
skipBars = ##t
}
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ea/lily-36b7ad93.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ea/lily-36b7ad93.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="laissez-vibrer-ties.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Laissez vibrer ties</h3>
<p>Laissez vibrer ties have a fixed size. Their formatting can be tuned
using <code>'tie-configuration</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<c e g>4\laissezVibrer r <c f g>\laissezVibrer r
<c d f g>4\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4.\laissezVibrer r8
<c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r
\override LaissezVibrerTieColumn #'tie-configuration
= #`((-7 . ,DOWN)
(-5 . ,DOWN)
(-3 . ,UP)
(-1 . ,UP))
<c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="fd/lily-61b8d987.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="fd/lily-61b8d987.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="letter-tablature-formatting.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Letter tablature formatting</h3>
<p>Tablature can be formatted using letters instead of
numbers.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define (letter-tablature-format str context event)
(let*
((tuning (ly:context-property context 'stringTunings))
(pitch (ly:event-property event 'pitch)))
(make-whiteout-markup
(make-vcenter-markup
(string (integer->char
(+ (char->integer #\a)
(- (ly:pitch-semitones pitch)
(list-ref tuning (- str 1))))))))))
music = \relative c {
c4 d e f
g4 a b c
d4 e f g
}
<<
\new Staff {
\clef "G_8"
\music
}
\new TabStaff \with {
tablatureFormat = #letter-tablature-format
} {
\music
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="06/lily-8b6a0e98.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="06/lily-8b6a0e98.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="modern-tab-text-clef.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Modern TAB text clef</h3>
<p>Use a markup text to replace the (TAB) clef glyph with a modern font.
<pre class="verbatim">
TAB = \markup {
\raise #1.5
\sans
\bold
\huge
\override #'(baseline-skip . 2.5)
\center-column {
T
A
B
}
}
\new TabStaff {
\override Staff.Clef #'stencil = #(lambda (grob)
ly:clef::print (grob-interpret-markup grob TAB))
a
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d9/lily-7ff0d7c4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d9/lily-7ff0d7c4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="placement-of-right-hand-fingerings.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Placement of right-hand fingerings</h3>
<p>It is possible to exercise greater control over the placement of
right-hand fingerings by setting a specific property, as demonstrated
in the following example.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(define RH rightHandFinger)
\relative c {
\clef "treble_8"
\set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(up down)
<c-\RH #1 e-\RH #2 g-\RH #3 c-\RH #4 >4
\set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(up right down)
<c-\RH #1 e-\RH #2 g-\RH #3 c-\RH #4 >4
\set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(left)
<c-\RH #1 e-\RH #2 g-\RH #3 c-\RH #4 >2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c4/lily-716f1902.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c4/lily-716f1902.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="polyphony-in-tablature.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Polyphony in tablature</h3>
<p>Polyphony is created the same way in a <code>TabStaff</code> as in a regular
staff.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c' {
\time 12/8
\key e \minor
\voiceOne
r4. r8 e, fis g16 b g e e' b c b a g fis e
}
lower = \relative c {
\key e \minor
\voiceTwo
r16 e d c b a g4 fis8 e fis g a b c
}
\score {
<<
\new StaffGroup = "tab with traditional" <<
\new Staff = "guitar traditional" <<
\clef "treble_8"
\context Voice = "upper" \upper
\context Voice = "lower" \lower
>>
\new TabStaff = "guitar tab" <<
\context TabVoice = "upper" \upper
\context TabVoice = "lower" \lower
>>
>>
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d1/lily-8daee2d6.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d1/lily-8daee2d6.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="stem-and-beam-behavior-in-tablature.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Stem and beam behavior in tablature</h3>
<p>The direction of stems is controlled the same way in tablature as in
traditional notation. Beams can be made horizontal, as shown in this
example.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new TabStaff {
\relative c {
g16 b d g b d g b
\stemDown
\override Beam #'damping = #+inf.0
g,,16 b d g b d g b
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e7/lily-1c507d5a.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e7/lily-1c507d5a.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Unfretted-strings"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Unfretted strings</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Unfretted-string-instruments">Unfretted string instruments</a>.
<p><a name="changing--flageolet-mark-size.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing \flageolet mark size</h3>
<p>To make the <code>\flageolet</code> circle smaller use the following Scheme
function.
<pre class="verbatim">
smallFlageolet = #(let ((m (make-music 'ArticulationEvent
'articulation-type "flageolet")))
(set! (ly:music-property m 'tweaks)
(acons 'font-size -3
(ly:music-property m 'tweaks)))
m)
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c'' {
d4^\flageolet_\markup { default size } d_\flageolet
c4^\smallFlageolet_\markup { smaller } c_\smallFlageolet
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f0/lily-49d06399.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f0/lily-49d06399.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-slurs-across-voices.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating slurs across voices</h3>
<p>In some situations, it may be necessary to create slurs between notes
from different voices.
<p>The solution is to add invisible notes to one of the voices, using
<code>\hideNotes</code>.
<p>This example is measure 235 of the Ciaconna from Bach's 2nd Partita for
solo violin, BWV 1004.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<< {
d16( a') s a s a[ s a] s a[ s a]
}
\\
{
\slurUp
bes,16[ s e](
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes f[(
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes fis](
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes g[(
\hideNotes a)
\unHideNotes gis](
\hideNotes a)
} >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ce/lily-e9383e5e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ce/lily-e9383e5e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="demo-midiinstruments.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Demo MidiInstruments</h3>
<p>Problem: How to know which <code>midiInstrument</code> would be best for your
composition? Solution: A LilyPond demo file.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
title = "Demo of all midi sounds"
arranger = "Myself "
}
basemelodie = \relative c' {
c4. \mf g c16 b' c d
e16 d e f g4 g'4 r
R1
}
melodie = { \tempo 4 = 150 \basemelodie }
\score {
\new Staff <<
\new Voice { \melodie
}
>>
\layout { }
}
\score {
\new Staff <<
%\set Staff.instrumentName= #"S/A"
%\set Staff.midiMinimumVolume = #0.2
%\set Staff.midiMaximumVolume = #0.4
%\set Voice.dynamicAbsoluteVolumeFunction = #0.6
\new Voice { r \mf
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic grand" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bright acoustic" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric grand" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"honky-tonk" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric piano 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric piano 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"harpsichord" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clav" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"celesta" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"glockenspiel" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"music box" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"vibraphone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"marimba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"xylophone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tubular bells" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"dulcimer" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"drawbar organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"percussive organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"rock organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"church organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"reed organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"accordion" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"harmonica" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"concertina" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic guitar (nylon)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic guitar (steel)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (jazz)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (clean)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (muted)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"overdriven guitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"distorted guitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic bass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric bass (finger)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric bass (pick)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fretless bass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"slap bass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"slap bass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth bass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth bass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"violin" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"viola" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"cello" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"contrabass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tremolo strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pizzicato strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"orchestral strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"timpani" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"string ensemble 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"string ensemble 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthstrings 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthstrings 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"choir aahs" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"voice oohs" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth voice" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"orchestra hit" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trombone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tuba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"muted trumpet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"french horn" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"brass section" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthbrass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthbrass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"soprano sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"alto sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tenor sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"baritone sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"oboe" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"english horn" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bassoon" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clarinet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"piccolo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"flute" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"recorder" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pan flute" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"blown bottle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shakuhachi" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"whistle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"ocarina" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 1 (square)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 2 (sawtooth)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 3 (calliope)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 4 (chiff)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 5 (charang)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 6 (voice)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 7 (fifths)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 8 (bass+lead)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 1 (new age)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 2 (warm)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 3 (polysynth)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 4 (choir)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 5 (bowed)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 6 (metallic)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 7 (halo)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 8 (sweep)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 1 (rain)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 2 (soundtrack)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 3 (crystal)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 4 (atmosphere)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 5 (brightness)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 6 (goblins)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 7 (echoes)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 8 (sci-fi)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"sitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"banjo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shamisen" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"koto" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"kalimba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bagpipe" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fiddle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shanai" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tinkle bell" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"agogo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"steel drums" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"woodblock" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"taiko drum" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"melodic tom" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth drum" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"reverse cymbal" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"guitar fret noise" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"breath noise" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"seashore" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bird tweet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"telephone ring" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"helicopter" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"applause" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"gunshot" \melodie
}
>>
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-d2f91df9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-d2f91df9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="string-quartet-template-simple.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">String quartet template (simple)</h3>
<p>This template demonstrates a simple string quartet. It also uses a
<code>\global</code> section for time and key signatures
<pre class="verbatim">
global= {
\time 4/4
\key c \major
}
violinOne = \new Voice \relative c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin 1 "
c2 d
e1
\bar "|."
}
violinTwo = \new Voice \relative c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin 2 "
g2 f
e1
\bar "|."
}
viola = \new Voice \relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Viola "
\clef alto
e2 d
c1
\bar "|."
}
cello = \new Voice \relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Cello "
\clef bass
c2 b
a1
\bar "|."
}
\score {
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff << \global \violinOne >>
\new Staff << \global \violinTwo >>
\new Staff << \global \viola >>
\new Staff << \global \cello >>
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c0/lily-052deeba.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c0/lily-052deeba.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="string-quartet-template-with-separate-parts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">String quartet template with separate parts</h3>
<p>The "String quartet template" snippet produces a nice string quartet,
but what if you needed to print parts? This new template demonstrates
how to use the <code>\tag</code> feature to easily split a piece into
individual parts.
<p>You need to split this template into separate files; the filenames are
contained in comments at the beginning of each file. <code>piece.ly</code>
contains all the music definitions. The other files – <code>score.ly</code>,
<code>vn1.ly</code>, <code>vn2.ly</code>, <code>vla.ly</code>, and <code>vlc.ly</code> –
produce the appropriate part.
<p>Do not forget to remove specified comments when using separate files!
<pre class="verbatim">
%%%%% piece.ly
%%%%% (This is the global definitions file)
global= {
\time 4/4
\key c \major
}
Violinone = \new Voice { \relative c''{
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin 1 "
c2 d e1
\bar "|." }} %*********************************
Violintwo = \new Voice { \relative c''{
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin 2 "
g2 f e1
\bar "|." }} %*********************************
Viola = \new Voice { \relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Viola "
\clef alto
e2 d c1
\bar "|." }} %*********************************
Cello = \new Voice { \relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Cello "
\clef bass
c2 b a1
\bar "|."}} %**********************************
music = {
<<
\tag #'score \tag #'vn1 \new Staff { << \global \Violinone >> }
\tag #'score \tag #'vn2 \new Staff { << \global \Violintwo>> }
\tag #'score \tag #'vla \new Staff { << \global \Viola>> }
\tag #'score \tag #'vlc \new Staff { << \global \Cello>> }
>>
}
%%% These are the other files you need to save on your computer
%%%%% score.ly
%%%%% (This is the main file)
%\include "piece.ly" %%% uncomment this line when using a separate file
#(set-global-staff-size 14)
\score {
\new StaffGroup \keepWithTag #'score \music
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
%{ Uncomment this block when using separate files
%%%%% vn1.ly
%%%%% (This is the Violin 1 part file)
\include "piece.ly"
\score {
\keepWithTag #'vn1 \music
\layout { }
}
%%%%% vn2.ly
%%%%% (This is the Violin 2 part file)
\include "piece.ly"
\score {
\keepWithTag #'vn2 \music
\layout { }
}
%%%%% vla.ly
%%%%% (This is the Viola part file)
\include "piece.ly"
\score {
\keepWithTag #'vla \music
\layout { }
}
%%%%% vlc.ly
%%%%% (This is the Cello part file)
\include "piece.ly"
\score {
\keepWithTag #'vlc \music
\layout { }
}
%}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8c/lily-5f210b23.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8c/lily-5f210b23.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Winds"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Winds</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Wind-instruments">Wind instruments</a>.
<p><a name="breathing-signs.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Breathing signs</h3>
<p>Breathing signs are available in different tastes: commas (default),
ticks, vees and "railroad tracks" (caesura).
<pre class="verbatim">
\new Staff \relative c'' {
\key es \major
\time 3/4
% this bar contains no \breathe
<< { g4 as g } \\ { es4 bes es } >> |
% Modern notation:
% by default, \breathe uses the rcomma, just as if saying:
% \override BreathingSign #'text = #(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.rcomma")
<< { g4 as g } \\ { es4 \breathe bes es } >> |
% rvarcomma and lvarcomma are variations of the default rcomma and lcomma
% N.B.: must use Staff context here, since we start a Voice below
\override Staff.BreathingSign #'text = #(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.rvarcomma")
<< { g4 as g } \\ { es4 \breathe bes es } >> |
% vee
\override BreathingSign #'text = #(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.upbow")
es8[ d es f g] \breathe f |
% caesura
\override BreathingSign #'text = #(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.caesura.curved")
es8[ d] \breathe es[ f g f] |
es2 r4 \bar "||"
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="da/lily-1c4b324f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="da/lily-1c4b324f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Ancient-notation"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Ancient notation</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Ancient-notation">Ancient notation</a>.
<p><a name="adding-a-figured-bass-above-or-below-the-notes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding a figured bass above or below the notes</h3>
<p>When writing a figured bass, here's a way to specify if you want your
figures to be placed above or below the bass notes, by defining the
<code>BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction</code> property (exclusively
in a <code>Staff</code> context). Choices are <code>#UP</code> (or <code>#1</code>),
<code>#CENTER</code> (or <code>#0</code>) and <code>#DOWN</code> (or <code>#-1</code>).
<p>As you can see here, this property can be changed as many times as you
wish. Use <code>\once \override</code> if you don't want the tweak to apply
to the whole score.
<pre class="verbatim">
bass = { \clef bass g4 b, c d e d8 c d2}
continuo = \figuremode {
< _ >4 < 6 >8
\once \override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #CENTER
<5/> < _ >4
\override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #UP
< _+ > < 6 >
\set Staff.useBassFigureExtenders = ##t
\override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #DOWN
< 4 >4. < 4 >8 < _+ >4
}
\score {
<< \new Staff = bassStaff \bass
\context Staff = bassStaff \continuo >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c3/lily-30b0c753.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c3/lily-30b0c753.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ancient-fonts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ancient fonts</h3>
<p>Here are shown many (all?) of the symbols that are included in
LilyPond's support of ancient notation.
<pre class="verbatim">
upperStaff = \context GregorianStaff = "upperStaff" <<
\context GregorianVoice <<
\set Score.timing = ##f
% \set Score.forceAccidental = ##t %%%%%%%% FIXME: what happened to this property?
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-count = #4
\transpose c c {
\override Staff.KeySignature #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-vaticana-glyph-name-alist
\override Staff.Accidental #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-vaticana-glyph-name-alist
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.punctum
\key es \major
\clef "vaticana-fa2"
c!1 des! e! f! ges!
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.inclinatum
a! b! ces'
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3.0 \bar "|"
% \break % 1 (8*1)
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.quilisma
b! des'! ges! fes!
\breathe
\clef "vaticana-fa1"
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.plica
es d
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.reverse-plica
c d
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3.0 \bar "|"
% \break %2 (8*1)
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.punctum-cavum
es f
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.lpes
g as
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.upes
bes as
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.vupes
g f
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.linea-punctum
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #2.0 \bar "|"
% \break % 3 (8*1)
es d
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.epiphonus
c d
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.cephalicus
es f
\override Staff.KeySignature #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-medicaea-glyph-name-alist
\override Staff.Accidental #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-medicaea-glyph-name-alist
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'medicaea
\override NoteHead #'style = #'medicaea.punctum
\clef "medicaea-fa2"
ces! des!
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3.0 \bar "|"
% \break % 4 (8*1)
e! f! ges!
\clef "medicaea-do2"
\override NoteHead #'style = #'medicaea.inclinatum
a! b! ces'!
\override NoteHead #'style = #'medicaea.virga
b! a!
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3.0 \bar "|"
% \break % 5 (8*1)
ges! fes!
\clef "medicaea-fa1"
\override NoteHead #'style = #'medicaea.rvirga
e! des! ces!
\override Staff.KeySignature #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-hufnagel-glyph-name-alist
\override Staff.Accidental #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-hufnagel-glyph-name-alist
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'hufnagel
\override NoteHead #'style = #'hufnagel.punctum
\clef "hufnagel-fa2"
ces! des! es!
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3.0 \bar "|"
% \break % 6 (8*1)
fes! ges!
\clef "hufnagel-do2"
\override NoteHead #'style = #'hufnagel.lpes
as! bes! ces'!
\override NoteHead #'style = #'hufnagel.virga
bes! as!
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3.0 \bar "|"
% \break % 7 (8*1)
ges! fes!
\clef "hufnagel-do-fa"
\override NoteHead #'style = #'hufnagel.punctum
es! des! ces! des! es! fes!
\bar "||"
% \break % 8 (8*1)
s32*1
% \break % 12 (32*1)
}
>>
>>
lowerStaff = \context MensuralStaff = "lowerStaff" <<
\context MensuralVoice <<
% this is broken until further notice -- see refman
% \override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-count = #5
\applyOutput #'Staff #(outputproperty-compatibility (make-type-checker 'staff-symbol-interface) 'line-count 5)
\transpose c c {
\set autoBeaming = ##f
\override NoteHead #'style = #'neomensural
\override Rest #'style = #'neomensural
\key a \major
% FIXME: lily crashes on some (invalid?) ligatures with:
% ERROR: In procedure gh_scm2int:
% ERROR: Wrong type argument in position 1: ()
% FIXME: lily emits "Programming error: Infinity or NaN encountered"
% on many ligatures such as BB.
cis'1 d'\breve gis'\breve e'\breve \[ e'\longa fis'\longa \]
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\clef "neomensural-c2"
cis1
\bar "|"
% \break % 2 (16*1)
\[ g\breve dis''\longa \]
b\breve \[ a\longa d\longa \]
\clef "petrucci-c2"
% \break % 4 (16*1)
fis1 ces1
\clef "petrucci-c2"
r\longa
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\clef "mensural-c2"
r\breve
\bar "|"
% \break % 5 (8*1)
r2
\clef "mensural-g"
r4 r8 r16 r16
\override NoteHead #'style = #'mensural
\override Stem #'flag-style = #'mensural
\override Stem #'thickness = #1.0
\override Rest #'style = #'mensural
\clef "petrucci-f"
c8 b, c16 b, c32 b, c64 b, c64 b,
d8 e d16 e d32 e d64 e d64 e
r\longa
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\clef "petrucci-f"
r\breve
\bar "|"
% \break % 6 (8*1)
r\breve
\clef "mensural-f"
% FIXME: must set Stem flag-style to #'neomensural to avoid
% segmentation fault on r8/r16/r32. (Strange: what has
% Stem flag-style to do with mensural rests?)
\override Stem #'flag-style = #'neomensural
% FIXME: produces warnings about "flag `neomensurald4' (or 3) not found".
r2 r4 r8 r16 r16
\override Stem #'flag-style = #'mensural
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\clef "mensural-f"
e\breve f g a1
\clef "mensural-g"
% \break % 7 (8*1)
\[ bes'!\longa a'!\longa c''!\longa \]
e'1 d' c' d' \bar "|"
\bar "|"
% \break % 9 (16*1)
bes'!\longa fis'!1 as'!1 ges'!\longa % lig
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\clef "mensural-g"
e'2 d' c' \bar "|"
% \break % 11 (16*1)
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\clef "petrucci-g"
c'2 d' e' f'
\clef "petrucci-g"
g' as'! bes'! cis''!
bes'! as'! gis'! fis'!
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\clef "mensural-g"
es'! des'! cis'!1 \bar "||"
% \break % 12 (8*1)
}
>>
>>
\paper {
line-thickness = #(/ staff-space 5.0)
}
\score {
\context Score <<
\upperStaff
\lowerStaff
>>
\layout {
% do we want to keep these settings? -gp
line-width = 17.25\cm
textheight = 26.0\cm
indent = 0.0
\context {
\Score
\accepts MensuralStaff
\accepts GregorianStaff
% timing = ##f %%%%%%%% FIXME: this has no effect
}
\context {
\Voice
\name MensuralVoice
\alias Voice
\remove Ligature_bracket_engraver
\consists Mensural_ligature_engraver
\override NoteHead #'style = #'mensural
% \override Stem #'flag-style = #'mensural %%%%%%%% FIXME: this core dumps
\override Stem #'thickness = #1.0
\override Rest #'style = #'mensural
autoBeaming = ##f
}
\context {
\Voice
\name GregorianVoice
\alias Voice
\remove Ligature_bracket_engraver
% \consists Gregorian_ligature_engraver %%%%%%%% TODO: not yet implemented
\override NoteHead #'style = #'vaticana.punctum
autoBeaming = ##f
}
\context {
\Staff
\name MensuralStaff
\alias Staff
\accepts MensuralVoice
\consists Custos_engraver
\override TimeSignature #'style = #'mensural
\override KeySignature #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-mensural-glyph-name-alist
\override Accidental #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-mensural-glyph-name-alist
\override Custos #'style = #'mensural
\override Custos #'neutral-position = #3
\override Custos #'neutral-direction = #-1
clefGlyph = #"clefs.petrucci-c2"
clefPosition = #-2
clefOctavation = #0
}
\context {
\Staff
\name GregorianStaff
\alias Staff
\accepts GregorianVoice
\consists Custos_engraver
\remove Time_signature_engraver
\override StaffSymbol #'thickness = #2.0
\override StaffSymbol #'line-count = #4
\override KeySignature #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-vaticana-glyph-name-alist
\override Accidental #'glyph-name-alist = #alteration-vaticana-glyph-name-alist
\override Custos #'style = #'vaticana
\override Custos #'neutral-position = #4
\override Custos #'neutral-direction = #-1
clefGlyph = #"clefs.vaticana-do"
clefPosition = #1
clefOctavation = #0
}
\context {
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext
\accepts MensuralVoice
\accepts GregorianVoice
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="fe/lily-afb44340.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="fe/lily-afb44340.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ancient-notation-template----modern-transcription-of-gregorian-music.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ancient notation template – modern transcription of gregorian music</h3>
<p>This example demonstrates how to do modern transcription of Gregorian
music. Gregorian music has no measure, no stems; it uses only half and
quarter note heads, and special marks, indicating rests of different
length.
<pre class="verbatim">
\include "gregorian-init.ly"
chant = \relative c' {
\set Score.timing = ##f
f4 a2 \divisioMinima
g4 b a2 f2 \divisioMaior
g4( f) f( g) a2 \finalis
}
verba = \lyricmode {
Lo -- rem ip -- sum do -- lor sit a -- met
}
\score {
\new Staff <<
\new Voice = "melody" \chant
\new Lyrics = "one" \lyricsto melody \verba
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Bar_engraver"
\override Stem #'transparent = ##t
}
\context {
\Voice
\override Stem #'length = #0
}
\context {
\Score
barAlways = ##t
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="92/lily-0f9ec382.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="92/lily-0f9ec382.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ancient-notation-template----modern-transcription-of-mensural-music.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ancient notation template – modern transcription of mensural music</h3>
<p>When transcribing mensural music, an incipit at the beginning of the
piece is useful to indicate the original key and tempo. While today
musicians are used to bar lines in order to faster recognize rhythmic
patterns, bar lines were not yet invented during the period of mensural
music; in fact, the meter often changed after every few notes. As a
compromise, bar lines are often printed between the staves rather than
on the staves.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\set Score.skipBars = ##t
% incipit
\once \override Score.SystemStartBracket #'transparent = ##t
\override Score.SpacingSpanner #'spacing-increment = #1.0 % tight spacing
\key f \major
\time 2/2
\once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'style = #'neomensural
\override Voice.NoteHead #'style = #'neomensural
\override Voice.Rest #'style = #'neomensural
\set Staff.printKeyCancellation = ##f
\cadenzaOn % turn off bar lines
\skip 1*10
\once \override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##f
\bar "||"
\skip 1*1 % need this extra \skip such that clef change comes
% after bar line
\bar ""
% main
\revert Score.SpacingSpanner #'spacing-increment % CHECK: no effect?
\cadenzaOff % turn bar lines on again
\once \override Staff.Clef #'full-size-change = ##t
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\key g \major
\time 4/4
\override Voice.NoteHead #'style = #'default
\override Voice.Rest #'style = #'default
% FIXME: setting printKeyCancellation back to #t must not
% occur in the first bar after the incipit. Dto. for forceClef.
% Therefore, we need an extra \skip.
\skip 1*1
\set Staff.printKeyCancellation = ##t
\set Staff.forceClef = ##f
\skip 1*7 % the actual music
% let finis bar go through all staves
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##f
% finis bar
\bar "|."
}
discantusNotes = {
\transpose c' c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Discantus "
% incipit
\clef "neomensural-c1"
c'1. s2 % two bars
\skip 1*8 % eight bars
\skip 1*1 % one bar
% main
\clef "treble"
d'2. d'4 |
b e' d'2 |
c'4 e'4.( d'8 c' b |
a4) b a2 |
b4.( c'8 d'4) c'4 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t c'1 |
b\breve |
}
}
discantusLyrics = \lyricmode {
% incipit
IV-
% main
Ju -- bi -- |
la -- te De -- |
o, om --
nis ter -- |
ra, __ om- |
"..." |
-us. |
}
altusNotes = {
\transpose c' c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Altus "
% incipit
\clef "neomensural-c3"
r1 % one bar
f1. s2 % two bars
\skip 1*7 % seven bars
\skip 1*1 % one bar
% main
\clef "treble"
r2 g2. e4 fis g | % two bars
a2 g4 e |
fis g4.( fis16 e fis4) |
g1 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t g1 |
g\breve |
}
}
altusLyrics = \lyricmode {
% incipit
IV-
% main
Ju -- bi -- la -- te | % two bars
De -- o, om -- |
nis ter -- ra, |
"..." |
-us. |
}
tenorNotes = {
\transpose c' c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Tenor "
% incipit
\clef "neomensural-c4"
r\longa % four bars
r\breve % two bars
r1 % one bar
c'1. s2 % two bars
\skip 1*1 % one bar
\skip 1*1 % one bar
% main
\clef "treble_8"
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
r2 d'2. d'4 b e' | % two bars
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t e'1 |
d'\breve |
}
}
tenorLyrics = \lyricmode {
% incipit
IV-
% main
Ju -- bi -- la -- te | % two bars
"..." |
-us. |
}
bassusNotes = {
\transpose c' c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bassus "
% incipit
\clef "bass"
r\maxima % eight bars
f1. s2 % two bars
\skip 1*1 % one bar
% main
\clef "bass"
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
g2. e4 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t e1 |
g\breve |
}
}
bassusLyrics = \lyricmode {
% incipit
IV-
% main
Ju -- bi- |
"..." |
-us. |
}
\score {
\new StaffGroup = choirStaff <<
\new Voice =
"discantusNotes" << \global \discantusNotes >>
\new Lyrics =
"discantusLyrics" \lyricsto discantusNotes { \discantusLyrics }
\new Voice =
"altusNotes" << \global \altusNotes >>
\new Lyrics =
"altusLyrics" \lyricsto altusNotes { \altusLyrics }
\new Voice =
"tenorNotes" << \global \tenorNotes >>
\new Lyrics =
"tenorLyrics" \lyricsto tenorNotes { \tenorLyrics }
\new Voice =
"bassusNotes" << \global \bassusNotes >>
\new Lyrics =
"bassusLyrics" \lyricsto bassusNotes { \bassusLyrics }
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
% no bars in staves
\override BarLine #'transparent = ##t
% incipit should not start with a start delimiter
\remove "System_start_delimiter_engraver"
}
\context {
\Voice
% no slurs
\override Slur #'transparent = ##t
% Comment in the below "\remove" command to allow line
% breaking also at those barlines where a note overlaps
% into the next bar. The command is commented out in this
% short example score, but especially for large scores, you
% will typically yield better line breaking and thus improve
% overall spacing if you comment in the following command.
%\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a9/lily-f99b5fb1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a9/lily-f99b5fb1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ancient-time-signatures.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ancient time signatures</h3>
<p>Time signatures may also be engraved in an old style.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'style = #'neomensural
s1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a1/lily-14b7045f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a1/lily-14b7045f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="chant-or-psalms-notation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Chant or psalms notation</h3>
<p>This form of notation is used for the chant of the Psalms, where verses
aren't always the same length.
<pre class="verbatim">
stemOn = { \override Staff.Stem #'transparent = ##f }
stemOff = { \override Staff.Stem #'transparent = ##t }
\score {
\new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" }
{
\key g \minor
\set Score.timing = ##f
\stemOff a'\breve bes'4 g'4
\stemOn a'2 \bar "||"
\stemOff a'\breve g'4 a'4
\stemOn f'2 \bar "||"
\stemOff a'\breve^\markup { \italic flexe }
\stemOn g'2 \bar "||"
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="36/lily-43a8112c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="36/lily-43a8112c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="custodes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Custodes</h3>
<p>Custodes may be engraved in various styles.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
\new Staff \with { \consists "Custos_engraver" } \relative c' {
\override Staff.Custos #'neutral-position = #4
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'hufnagel
c1^"hufnagel" \break
<d a' f'>1
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'medicaea
c1^"medicaea" \break
<d a' f'>1
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'vaticana
c1^"vaticana" \break
<d a' f'>1
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'mensural
c1^"mensural" \break
<d a' f'>1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9c/lily-d7f7902b.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9c/lily-d7f7902b.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="incipit.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Incipit</h3>
<p>Incipits can be added using the instrument name grob, but
keeping separate the instrument name definition and the incipit definition.
<pre class="verbatim">
incipit =
#(define-music-function (parser location incipit-music) (ly:music?)
#{
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'self-alignment-X = #RIGHT
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'self-alignment-Y = #UP
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'Y-offset = #4
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'padding = #0.3
\once \override Staff.InstrumentName #'stencil =
#(lambda (grob)
(let* ((instrument-name (ly:grob-property grob 'long-text))
(layout (ly:output-def-clone (ly:grob-layout grob)))
(music (make-music 'SequentialMusic
'elements (list (make-music 'ContextSpeccedMusic
'context-type 'MensuralStaff
'element (make-music 'PropertySet
'symbol 'instrumentName
'value instrument-name))
$incipit-music)))
(score (ly:make-score music))
(mm (ly:output-def-lookup layout 'mm))
(indent (ly:output-def-lookup layout 'indent))
(width (ly:output-def-lookup layout 'incipit-width))
(incipit-width (if (number? width)
(* width mm)
(* indent 0.5))))
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'indent (- indent incipit-width))
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'line-width indent)
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'ragged-right #f)
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'ragged-last #f)
(ly:output-def-set-variable! layout 'system-count 1)
(ly:score-add-output-def! score layout)
(set! (ly:grob-property grob 'long-text)
(markup #:score score))
(ly:system-start-text::print grob)))
#})
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
global = {
\set Score.skipBars = ##t
\key g \major
\time 4/4
%make the staff lines invisible on staves
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##t
% the actual music
\skip 1*8
% let finis bar go through all staves
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##f
% finis bar
\bar "|."
}
discantusIncipit = <<
\new MensuralVoice = discantusIncipit <<
\repeat unfold 9 { s1 \noBreak }
{
\clef "neomensural-c1"
\key f \major
\time 2/2
c''1.
}
>>
\new Lyrics \lyricsto discantusIncipit { IV- }
>>
discantusNotes = {
\transpose c' c'' {
\clef "treble"
d'2. d'4 |
b e' d'2 |
c'4 e'4.( d'8 c' b |
a4) b a2 |
b4.( c'8 d'4) c'4 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
c'1 |
b\breve |
}
}
discantusLyrics = \lyricmode {
Ju -- bi -- |
la -- te De -- |
o, om --
nis ter -- |
ra, __ om- |
"..." |
-us. |
}
altusIncipit = <<
\new MensuralVoice = altusIncipit <<
\repeat unfold 9 { s1 \noBreak }
{
\clef "neomensural-c3"
\key f \major
\time 2/2
r1 f'1.
}
>>
\new Lyrics \lyricsto altusIncipit { IV- }
>>
altusNotes = {
\transpose c' c'' {
\clef "treble"
% two measures
r2 g2. e4 fis g |
a2 g4 e |
fis g4.( fis16 e fis4) |
g1 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
g1 |
g\breve |
}
}
altusLyrics = \lyricmode {
% two measures
Ju -- bi -- la -- te |
De -- o, om -- |
nis ter -- ra, |
"..." |
-us. |
}
tenorIncipit = <<
\new MensuralVoice = tenorIncipit <<
\repeat unfold 9 { s1 \noBreak }
{
\clef "neomensural-c4"
\key f \major
\time 2/2
r\longa
r\breve
r1 c'1.
}
>>
\new Lyrics \lyricsto tenorIncipit { IV- }
>>
tenorNotes = {
\transpose c' c' {
\once \override Staff.VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-6 . 3)
\clef "treble_8"
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
% two measures
r2 d'2. d'4 b e' |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
e'1 |
d'\breve |
}
}
tenorLyrics = \lyricmode {
% two measures
Ju -- bi -- la -- te |
"..." |
-us.
}
bassusIncipit = <<
\new MensuralVoice = bassusIncipit <<
\repeat unfold 9 { s1 \noBreak }
{
\clef "bass"
\key f \major
\time 2/2
%% incipit
r\maxima
f1.
}
>>
\new Lyrics \lyricsto bassusIncipit { IV- }
>>
bassusNotes = {
\transpose c' c' {
\clef "bass"
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
g2. e4 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
e1 |
g\breve |
}
}
bassusLyrics = \lyricmode {
Ju -- bi- |
"..." |
-us.
}
\score {
<<
\new StaffGroup = choirStaff <<
\new Voice = "discantusNotes" <<
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Discantus"
\incipit \discantusIncipit
\discantusNotes
>>
\new Lyrics = "discantusLyrics" \lyricsto discantusNotes { \discantusLyrics }
\new Voice = "altusNotes" <<
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Altus"
\incipit \altusIncipit
\altusNotes
>>
\new Lyrics = "altusLyrics" \lyricsto altusNotes { \altusLyrics }
\new Voice = "tenorNotes" <<
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Tenor"
\incipit \tenorIncipit
\tenorNotes
>>
\new Lyrics = "tenorLyrics" \lyricsto tenorNotes { \tenorLyrics }
\new Voice = "bassusNotes" <<
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Bassus"
\incipit \bassusIncipit
\bassusNotes
>>
>>
\new Lyrics = "bassusLyrics" \lyricsto bassusNotes { \bassusLyrics }
%% Keep the bass lyrics outside of the staff group to avoid bar lines
%% between the lyrics.
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
%% no bar lines in staves
\override BarLine #'transparent = ##t
}
%% the next three instructions keep the lyrics between the bar lines
\context {
\Lyrics
\consists "Bar_engraver"
\override BarLine #'transparent = ##t
}
\context {
\StaffGroup
\consists "Separating_line_group_engraver"
}
\context {
\Voice
%% no slurs
\override Slur #'transparent = ##t
%% Comment in the below "\remove" command to allow line
%% breaking also at those bar lines where a note overlaps
%% into the next measure. The command is commented out in this
%% short example score, but especially for large scores, you
%% will typically yield better line breaking and thus improve
%% overall spacing if you comment in the following command.
%%\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
}
indent=6\cm
incipit-width = 4\cm
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="67/lily-f7349074.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="67/lily-f7349074.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="mensurstriche-layout-bar-lines-between-the-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Mensurstriche layout (bar lines between the staves)</h3>
<p>The mensurstriche-layout where the bar lines do not show on the staves
but between staves can be achieved with a <code>StaffGroup</code> instead of
a <code>ChoirStaff</code>. The bar line on staves is blanked out by setting
the <code>transparent</code> property.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##t
s1 s
% the final bar line is not interrupted
\revert Staff.BarLine #'transparent
\bar "|."
}
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
<<
\new Staff { << \global { c1 c } >> }
\new Staff { << \global { c c } >> }
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d4/lily-0139e5aa.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d4/lily-0139e5aa.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="rest-styles.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Rest styles</h3>
<p>Rests may be used in various styles.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
indent = 0.0
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
}
}
\relative c {
\set Score.timing = ##f
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'mensural
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { mensural }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'neomensural
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { neomensural }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'classical
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { classical }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'default
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { default }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b4/lily-5bfcd48c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b4/lily-5bfcd48c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="World-music"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">World music</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#World-music">World music</a>.
<p><a name="arabic-improvisation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Arabic improvisation</h3>
<p>For improvisations or <em>taqasim</em> which are
temporarily free, the time signature can be omitted and
<code>\cadenzaOn</code> can be used. Adjusting the accidental style
might be required, since the absence of bar lines will cause the
accidental to be marked only once. Here is an example of what
could be the start of a <em>hijaz</em> improvisation:
<pre class="verbatim">
\include "arabic.ly"
\relative sol' {
\key re \kurd
#(set-accidental-style 'forget)
\cadenzaOn
sol4 sol sol sol fad mib sol1 fad8 mib re4. r8 mib1 fad sol
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d9/lily-5b257064.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d9/lily-5b257064.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="makam.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Makam</h3>
<p>Makam is a type of melody from Turkey using 1/9th-tone
microtonal alterations. Consult the initialization file
<code>makam-init.ly</code> (see the `Learning Manual 2.11.57,
4.6.3 Other sources of information' for the location of this file)
for details of pitch names and alterations.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Initialize makam settings
\include "makam-init.ly"
\relative c' {
\set Staff.keySignature = #`((3 . ,BAKIYE) (6 . ,(- KOMA)))
c4 cc db fk
gbm4 gfc gfb efk
fk4 db cc c
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="5a/lily-1889f4f6.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="5a/lily-1889f4f6.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Contexts-and-engravers"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Contexts and engravers</h2>
<!-- FIXME make xref more precise when the chapter has been -->
<!-- revised in GDP -->
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Changing-defaults">Changing defaults</a>.
<p>See also Learning Manual, section
<a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond-learning.html#Contexts-and-engravers">Contexts and engravers</a>.
<p><a name="adding-a-figured-bass-above-or-below-the-notes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding a figured bass above or below the notes</h3>
<p>When writing a figured bass, here's a way to specify if you want your
figures to be placed above or below the bass notes, by defining the
<code>BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction</code> property (exclusively
in a <code>Staff</code> context). Choices are <code>#UP</code> (or <code>#1</code>),
<code>#CENTER</code> (or <code>#0</code>) and <code>#DOWN</code> (or <code>#-1</code>).
<p>As you can see here, this property can be changed as many times as you
wish. Use <code>\once \override</code> if you don't want the tweak to apply
to the whole score.
<pre class="verbatim">
bass = { \clef bass g4 b, c d e d8 c d2}
continuo = \figuremode {
< _ >4 < 6 >8
\once \override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #CENTER
<5/> < _ >4
\override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #UP
< _+ > < 6 >
\set Staff.useBassFigureExtenders = ##t
\override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #DOWN
< 4 >4. < 4 >8 < _+ >4
}
\score {
<< \new Staff = bassStaff \bass
\context Staff = bassStaff \continuo >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c3/lily-30b0c753.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c3/lily-30b0c753.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adding-an-extra-staff-at-a-line-break.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding an extra staff at a line break</h3>
<p>When adding a new staff at a line break, some extra space is
unfortunately added at the end of the line before the break (to fit in
a key signature change, which will never be printed anyway). The
workaround is to add a setting of
<code>Staff.explicitKeySignatureVisibility</code> as is shown in the example.
In versions 2.10 and earlier, a similar setting for the time signatures
is also required (see the example).
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
\new Staff
\key f \major
c1 c^"Unwanted extra space" \break
<< { c1 c }
\new Staff {
\key f \major
\once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
c1 c
}
>>
c1 c^"Fixed here" \break
<< { c1 c }
\new Staff {
\once \set Staff.explicitKeySignatureVisibility = #end-of-line-invisible
% The next line is not needed in 2.11.x or later:
\once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible
\key f \major
\once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
c1 c
}
>>
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="84/lily-0b4b70af.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="84/lily-0b4b70af.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="adding-an-extra-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding an extra staff</h3>
<p>An extra staff can be added (possibly temporarily) after the start of a
piece.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
<<
\new Staff \relative c'' { c1 c c c c }
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
\new Staff {
c1 c
<< c1 \new Staff { \once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f c1 } >>
c
}
}
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="47/lily-264ca3ec.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="47/lily-264ca3ec.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-midi-output-to-one-channel-per-voice.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing MIDI output to one channel per voice</h3>
<p>When outputting MIDI, the default behavior is for each staff to
represent one MIDI channel, with all the voices on a staff amalgamated.
This minimizes the risk of running out of MIDI channels, since there
are only 16 available per track.
<p>However, by moving the <code>Staff_performer</code> to the <code>Voice</code>
context, each voice on a staff can have its own MIDI channel, as is
demonstrated by the following example: despite being on the same staff,
two MIDI channels are created, each with a different
<code>midiInstrument</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new Staff <<
\new Voice \relative c''' {
\set midiInstrument = #"flute"
\voiceOne
\key g \major
\time 2/2
r2 g-"Flute" ~
g fis ~
fis4 g8 fis e2 ~
e4 d8 cis d2
}
\new Voice \relative c'' {
\set midiInstrument = #"clarinet"
\voiceTwo
b1-"Clarinet"
a2. b8 a
g2. fis8 e
fis2 r
}
>>
\layout { }
\midi {
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Staff_performer"
}
\context {
\Voice
\consists "Staff_performer"
}
\context {
\Score
tempoWholesPerMinute = #(ly:make-moment 72 2)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8a/lily-042a2177.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8a/lily-042a2177.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-time-signatures-inside-a-polymetric-section-using-scaledurations.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing time signatures inside a polymetric section using <code>\scaleDurations</code></h3>
<p>The <code>measureLength</code> property, together with
<code>measurePosition</code>, determines when a bar line is needed. However,
when using <code>\scaleDurations</code>, the scaling of durations makes it
difficult to change time signatures. In this case, <code>measureLength</code>
should be set manually, using the <code>ly:make-moment</code> callback. The
second argument must be the same as the second argument of
<code>\scaleDurations</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Timing_translator"
\remove "Default_bar_line_engraver"
}
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Timing_translator"
\consists "Default_bar_line_engraver"
}
}
<<
\new Staff {
\scaleDurations #'(8 . 5) {
\time 6/8
\set Timing.measureLength = #(ly:make-moment 3 5)
b8 b b b b b
\time 2/4
\set Timing.measureLength = #(ly:make-moment 2 5)
b4 b
}
}
\new Staff {
\clef bass
\time 2/4
c2 d e f
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9e/lily-7717a836.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9e/lily-7717a836.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="chant-or-psalms-notation.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Chant or psalms notation</h3>
<p>This form of notation is used for the chant of the Psalms, where verses
aren't always the same length.
<pre class="verbatim">
stemOn = { \override Staff.Stem #'transparent = ##f }
stemOff = { \override Staff.Stem #'transparent = ##t }
\score {
\new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" }
{
\key g \minor
\set Score.timing = ##f
\stemOff a'\breve bes'4 g'4
\stemOn a'2 \bar "||"
\stemOff a'\breve g'4 a'4
\stemOn f'2 \bar "||"
\stemOff a'\breve^\markup { \italic flexe }
\stemOn g'2 \bar "||"
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="36/lily-43a8112c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="36/lily-43a8112c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-blank-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating blank staves</h3>
<p>To create blank staves, generate empty measures then remove the
<code>Bar_number_engraver</code> from the <code>Score</code> context, and the
<code>Time_signature_engraver</code>, <code>Clef_engraver</code> and
<code>Bar_engraver</code> from the <code>Staff</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-global-staff-size 20)
\score {
{
\repeat unfold 12 { s1 \break }
}
\layout {
indent = 0\in
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Clef_engraver"
\remove "Bar_engraver"
}
\context {
\Score
\remove "Bar_number_engraver"
}
}
}
\paper {
#(set-paper-size "letter")
ragged-last-bottom = ##f
line-width = 7.5\in
left-margin = 0.5\in
bottom-margin = 0.25\in
top-margin = 0.25\in
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="63/lily-e0186df5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="63/lily-e0186df5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="engravers-one-by-one.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Engravers one-by-one</h3>
<p>The notation problem, creating a certain symbol, is handled by plugins.
Each plugin is called an Engraver. In this example, engravers are
switched on one by one, in the following order:
<p>- note heads
<p>- staff symbol,
<p>- clef,
<p>- stem,
<p>- beams, slurs, accents,
<p>- accidentals, bar lines, time signature, and key signature.
<p>Engravers are grouped. For example, note heads, slurs, beams etc. form
a Voice context. Engravers for key, accidental, bar, etc. form a Staff
context.
<p>You may only see the first example in this document; please download
this snippet and run it from your own computer.
<pre class="verbatim">
%% sample music
topVoice = \relative c' {
\key d\major
es8([ g] a[ fis])
b4
b16[-. b-. b-. cis-.]
d4->
}
botVoice = \relative c' {
\key d\major
c8[( f] b[ a)]
es4
es16[-. es-. es-. fis-.]
b4->
}
hoom = \relative c {
\key d \major
\clef bass
g8-. r
r4
fis8-.
r8
r4
b'4->
}
pah = \relative c' {
r8 b-.
r4
r8 g8-.
r16 g-. r8
\clef treble
fis'4->
}
%
% setup for Request->Element conversion. Guru-only
%
MyStaff =\context {
\type "Engraver_group"
\name Staff
\description "Handles clefs, bar lines, keys, accidentals. It can contain
@code{Voice} contexts."
\consists "Output_property_engraver"
\consists "Font_size_engraver"
\consists "Volta_engraver"
\consists "Separating_line_group_engraver"
\consists "Dot_column_engraver"
\consists "Ottava_spanner_engraver"
\consists "Rest_collision_engraver"
\consists "Piano_pedal_engraver"
\consists "Piano_pedal_align_engraver"
\consists "Instrument_name_engraver"
\consists "Grob_pq_engraver"
\consists "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
\consists "Axis_group_engraver"
\consists "Pitch_squash_engraver"
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-6 . 6)
extraVerticalExtent = ##f
verticalExtent = ##f
localKeySignature = #'()
% explicitly set instrument, so we don't get
% weird effects when doing instrument names for
% piano staves
instrumentName = #'()
shortInstrumentName = #'()
\accepts "Voice"
}
MyVoice = \context {
\type "Engraver_group"
\name Voice
\description "
Corresponds to a voice on a staff. This context handles the
conversion of dynamic signs, stems, beams, super- and subscripts,
slurs, ties, and rests.
You have to instantiate this explicitly if you want to have
multiple voices on the same staff."
localKeySignature = #'()
\consists "Font_size_engraver"
% must come before all
\consists "Output_property_engraver"
\consists "Arpeggio_engraver"
\consists "Multi_measure_rest_engraver"
\consists "Text_spanner_engraver"
\consists "Grob_pq_engraver"
\consists "Note_head_line_engraver"
\consists "Glissando_engraver"
\consists "Ligature_bracket_engraver"
\consists "Breathing_sign_engraver"
% \consists "Rest_engraver"
\consists "Grace_beam_engraver"
\consists "New_fingering_engraver"
\consists "Chord_tremolo_engraver"
\consists "Percent_repeat_engraver"
\consists "Slash_repeat_engraver"
%{
Must come before text_engraver, but after note_column engraver.
%}
\consists "Text_engraver"
\consists "Dynamic_engraver"
\consists "Fingering_engraver"
\consists "Script_column_engraver"
\consists "Rhythmic_column_engraver"
\consists "Cluster_spanner_engraver"
\consists "Tie_engraver"
\consists "Tie_engraver"
\consists "Tuplet_engraver"
\consists "Note_heads_engraver"
\consists "Rest_engraver"
\consists "Skip_event_swallow_translator"
}
\score {
\topVoice
\layout {
\context { \MyStaff }
\context { \MyVoice }
}
}
MyStaff = \context {
\MyStaff
\consists "Staff_symbol_engraver"
}
\score {
\topVoice
\layout {
\context { \MyStaff }
\context { \MyVoice }
}
}
MyStaff = \context {
\MyStaff
\consists "Clef_engraver"
\remove "Pitch_squash_engraver"
}
\score {
\topVoice
\layout {
\context { \MyStaff }
\context { \MyVoice }
}
}
MyVoice = \context {
\MyVoice
\consists "Stem_engraver"
}
\score {
\topVoice
\layout {
\context { \MyStaff }
\context { \MyVoice }
}
}
MyVoice = \context {
\MyVoice
\consists "Beam_engraver"
}
\score {
\topVoice
\layout {
\context { \MyStaff }
\context { \MyVoice }
}
}
MyVoice= \context {
\MyVoice
\consists "Phrasing_slur_engraver"
\consists "Slur_engraver"
\consists "Script_engraver"
}
\score {
\topVoice
\layout {
\context { \MyStaff }
\context { \MyVoice }
}
}
MyStaff = \context {
\MyStaff
\consists "Bar_engraver"
\consists "Time_signature_engraver"
}
\score {
\topVoice
\layout {
\context { \MyStaff }
\context { \MyVoice }
}
}
MyStaff = \context {
\MyStaff
\consists "Accidental_engraver"
\consists "Key_engraver"
}
\score {
\topVoice
\layout {
\context { \MyStaff }
\context { \MyVoice }
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d2/lily-2353f255.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d2/lily-2353f255.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="mensurstriche-layout-bar-lines-between-the-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Mensurstriche layout (bar lines between the staves)</h3>
<p>The mensurstriche-layout where the bar lines do not show on the staves
but between staves can be achieved with a <code>StaffGroup</code> instead of
a <code>ChoirStaff</code>. The bar line on staves is blanked out by setting
the <code>transparent</code> property.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##t
s1 s
% the final bar line is not interrupted
\revert Staff.BarLine #'transparent
\bar "|."
}
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
<<
\new Staff { << \global { c1 c } >> }
\new Staff { << \global { c c } >> }
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d4/lily-0139e5aa.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d4/lily-0139e5aa.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="nesting-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Nesting staves</h3>
<p>The property <code>systemStartDelimiterHierarchy</code> can be used to make
more complex nested staff groups. The command <code>\set
StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy</code> takes an alphabetical list of
the number of staves produced. Before each staff a system start
delimiter can be given. It has to be enclosed in brackets and takes as
much staves as the brackets enclose. Elements in the list can be
omitted, but the first bracket takes always the complete number of
staves. The possibilities are <code>SystemStartBar</code>,
<code>SystemStartBracket</code>, <code>SystemStartBrace</code>, and
<code>SystemStartSquare</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new StaffGroup
\relative c'' <<
\set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy
= #'(SystemStartSquare (SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a
(SystemStartSquare b) ) c ) d)
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c2/lily-70d9e59c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c2/lily-70d9e59c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="use-square-bracket-at-the-start-of-a-staff-group.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Use square bracket at the start of a staff group</h3>
<p>The system start delimiter <code>SystemStartSquare</code> can be used by
setting it explicitly in a <code>StaffGroup</code> or <code>ChoirStaffGroup</code>
context.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new StaffGroup { <<
\set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiter = #'SystemStartSquare
\new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' }
\new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' }
>> }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="6a/lily-bc90db5c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="6a/lily-bc90db5c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template-with-lyrics-aligned-below-and-above-the-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template with lyrics aligned below and above the staves</h3>
<p>This template is basically the same as the simple "Vocal ensemble"
template, with the exception that here all the lyrics lines are placed
using <code>alignAboveContext</code> and <code>alignBelowContext</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords = \lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> }
\new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = women } \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = women } \lyricsto altos \altoWords
% we could remove the line about this with the line below, since we want
% the alto lyrics to be below the alto Voice anyway.
% \new Lyrics \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> }
\new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = men } \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = men } \lyricsto basses \bassWords
% again, we could replace the line above this with the line below.
% \new Lyrics \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f3/lily-a11d4879.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f3/lily-a11d4879.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Tweaks-and-overrides"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Tweaks and overrides</h2>
<!-- FIXME make xref more precise when the chapter has been -->
<!-- revised in GDP -->
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Changing-defaults">Changing defaults</a>.
<p>See also Learning Manual, section
<a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond-learning.html#Tweaking-output">Tweaking output</a>.
<p><a name="alignment-vertical-spacing.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Alignment vertical spacing</h3>
<p>By setting properties in <code>NonMusicalPaperColumn</code>, vertical spacing
can be adjusted per system.
<p>By setting <code>alignment-extra-space</code> or
<code>fixed-alignment-extra-space</code> an individual system may be
stretched vertically.
<p>For technical reasons, <code>\overrideProperty</code> must be used for
changing these properties within a staff; <code>\override</code> in a
<code>\context</code> block may still be used for global overrides.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-global-staff-size 13)
\relative c''
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff {
c1 \break
c1 \break
c1 \break
}
\new Staff {
c1 | c | c
}
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Voice {
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"piano"
\set PianoStaff.shortInstrumentName = #"pn"
c1_"normal"
\overrideProperty
#"Score.NonMusicalPaperColumn"
#'line-break-system-details
#'((fixed-alignment-extra-space . 15))
c_"fixed-aligment-extra-space"
\overrideProperty
#"Score.NonMusicalPaperColumn"
#'line-break-system-details
#'((alignment-extra-space . 15))
c_"aligment-extra-space"
}
{ c1 | c | c }
>>
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9c/lily-a3881ca4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9c/lily-a3881ca4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="analysis-brackets-above-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Analysis brackets above the staff</h3>
<p>Simple horizontal analysis brackets are added below the staff by
default. The following example shows a way to place them above the
staff instead.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
\context {
\Voice
\consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver"
}
}
\relative c'' {
\once \override HorizontalBracket #'direction = #UP
c2\startGroup
d\stopGroup
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="17/lily-b04ac6ea.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="17/lily-b04ac6ea.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="caesura-railtracks-with-fermata.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Caesura ("railtracks") with fermata</h3>
<p>A caesura is sometimes denoted with a double "railtracks" breath mark
with a fermata sign positioned above. This snippet should present an
optically pleasing combination of railtracks and a fermata.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
c''2.
% construct the symbol
\override BreathingSign #'text = \markup {
\line {
\musicglyph #"scripts.caesura.curved"
\translate #'(-1.75 . 1.6)
\musicglyph #"scripts.ufermata"
}
}
\breathe c''4
% set the breathe mark back to normal
\revert BreathingSign #'text
c''2. \breathe c''4
\bar "|."
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c2/lily-16581e34.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c2/lily-16581e34.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-a-single-notes-size-in-a-chord.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing a single note's size in a chord</h3>
<p>Individual note heads in a chord can be modified with the
<code>\tweak</code> command inside a chord, by altering the <code>font-size</code>
property.
<p>Inside the chord (within the brackets <code>< ></code>), before the note to
be altered, place the <code>\tweak</code> command, followed by
<code>#'font-size</code> and define the proper size like <code>#-2</code> (a tiny
notehead).
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
\relative {
<\tweak #'font-size #+2 c e g c \tweak #'font-size #-2 e>1^\markup { A tiny e }_\markup { A big c }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="69/lily-7e4a3f0d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="69/lily-7e4a3f0d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-form-of-multi--measure-rests.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing form of multi-measure rests</h3>
<p>If there are ten or fewer measures of rests, a series of longa
and breve rests (called in German "Kirchenpausen" - church rests)
is printed within the staff; otherwise a simple line is shown.
This default number of ten may be changed by overriding the
<code>expand-limit</code> property:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\compressFullBarRests
R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9
\override MultiMeasureRest #'expand-limit = 3
R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="08/lily-6df2a91f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="08/lily-6df2a91f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-properties-for-individual-grobs.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing properties for individual grobs</h3>
<p>The <code>\applyOutput</code> command allows the tuning of any layout
object, in any context. It requires a Scheme function with three
arguments.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
ragged-right = ##t
}
#(define (mc-squared grob grob-origin context)
(let*
(
(ifs (ly:grob-interfaces grob))
(sp (ly:grob-property grob 'staff-position))
)
(if (memq 'note-head-interface ifs)
(begin
(ly:grob-set-property! grob 'stencil ly:text-interface::print)
(ly:grob-set-property! grob 'font-family 'roman)
(ly:grob-set-property! grob 'text
(make-raise-markup -0.5
(case sp
((-5) (make-simple-markup "m"))
((-3) (make-simple-markup "c "))
((-2) (make-smaller-markup (make-bold-markup "2")))
(else (make-simple-markup "bla"))
))))
)))
\relative c' {
<d f g b>2
\applyOutput #'Voice #mc-squared
<d f g b>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2f/lily-ce713f02.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2f/lily-ce713f02.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-text-and-spanner-styles-for-text-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing text and spanner styles for text dynamics</h3>
<p>The text used for crescendos and decrescendos can be
changed by modifying the context properties <code>crescendoText</code>
and <code>decrescendoText</code>. The style of the spanner line can
be changed by modifying the <code>'style</code> property of
<code>DynamicTextSpanner</code>. The default value is
<code>'hairpin</code>, and other possible values include
<code>'line</code>, <code>'dashed-line</code>, and
<code>'dotted-line</code>:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\set crescendoText = \markup { \italic { cresc. poco } }
\set crescendoSpanner = #'text
\override DynamicTextSpanner #'style = #'dotted-line
a2\< a
a2 a
a2 a
a2 a\mf
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ab/lily-453c0505.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ab/lily-453c0505.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-default-text-font-family.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the default text font family</h3>
<p>The default font families for text can be overridden with
<code>make-pango-font-tree</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
% change for other default global staff size.
myStaffSize = #20
%{
run
lilypond -dshow-available-fonts blabla
to show all fonts available in the process log.
%}
#(define fonts
(make-pango-font-tree "Times New Roman"
"Nimbus Sans"
"Luxi Mono"
;; "Helvetica"
;; "Courier"
(/ myStaffSize 20)))
}
\relative {
c'^\markup {
roman: foo \bold bla \italic bar \italic \bold baz
}
c'_\markup {
\override #'(font-family . sans)
{
sans: foo \bold bla \italic bar \italic \bold baz
}
}
c'2^\markup {
\override #'(font-family . typewriter)
{
mono: foo \bold bla \italic bar \italic \bold baz
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a1/lily-e2be3d91.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a1/lily-e2be3d91.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-staff-size.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the staff size</h3>
<p>Though the simplest way to resize staves is to use
<code>#(set-global-staff-size xx)</code>, an individual staff's size can be
changed by scaling the properties <code>staff-space</code> and
<code>fontSize</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\new Staff \relative c'' {
\dynamicDown
c8\ff c c c c c c c
}
\new Staff \with {
fontSize = #-3
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -3)
} {
\clef bass
c8 c c c c\f c c c
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="33/lily-eb10503d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="33/lily-eb10503d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="controlling-the-vertical-ordering-of-scripts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Controlling the vertical ordering of scripts</h3>
<p>The vertical ordering of scripts is controlled with the
<code>script-priority</code> property. The lower this number, the closer it
will be put to the note. In this example, the <code>TextScript</code> (the
sharp symbol) first has the lowest priority, so it is put lowest in the
first example. In the second, the prall trill (the <code>Script</code>) has
the lowest, so it is on the inside. When two objects have the same
priority, the order in which they are entered determines which one
comes first.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c''' {
\once \override TextScript #'script-priority = #-100
a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp }
\once \override Script #'script-priority = #-100
a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="df/lily-870d61d9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="df/lily-870d61d9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="controlling-tuplet-bracket-visibility.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Controlling tuplet bracket visibility</h3>
<p>The default behavior of tuplet-bracket visibility is to print a bracket
unless there is a beam of the same length as the tuplet. To control the
visibility of tuplet brackets, set the property <code>TupletBracket
#'bracket-visibility</code> to either <code>##t</code> (always print a bracket),
<code>##f</code> (never print a bracket) or <code>#'if-no-beam</code> (only print a
bracket if there is no beam).
<pre class="verbatim">
mus = \relative c'' {
\times 2/3 { c16[ d e } f8]
\times 2/3 { c8 d e }
\times 2/3 { c4 d e }
}
\new Voice \relative c'{
<< \mus s4^"default" >>
\override TupletBracket #'bracket-visibility = #'if-no-beam
<< \mus s4^"'if-no-beam" >>
\override TupletBracket #'bracket-visibility = ##t
<< \mus s4^"#t" >>
\override TupletBracket #'bracket-visibility = ##f
<< \mus s4^"#f" >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="08/lily-6e556f99.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="08/lily-6e556f99.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-simultaneous-rehearsal-marks.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating simultaneous rehearsal marks</h3>
<p>Unlike text scripts, rehearsal marks cannot be stacked at a particular point
in a score: only one <code>RehearsalMark</code> object is created. Using an
invisible measure and bar line, an extra rehearsal mark can be added, giving
the appearance of two marks in the same column.
<p>This method may also prove useful for placing rehearsal marks at both the
end of one system and the start of the following system.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
\key a \major
\set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-box-letters
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'outside-staff-priority = #5000
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(key-signature)
\mark \markup { \bold { Senza denti } }
% the hidden measure and bar line
\once \override Score.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
\time 1/16
s16 \bar ""
\time 4/4
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #LEFT
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(bar-line)
\mark \markup { \box \bold Intro }
d'1
\mark \default
d'1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="3a/lily-6eac71b0.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="3a/lily-6eac71b0.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-text-spanners.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating text spanners</h3>
<p>The <code>\startTextSpan</code> and <code>\stopTextSpan</code> commands allow the
creation of text spanners as easily as pedal indications or
octavations. Override some properties of the <code>TextSpanner</code> object
to modify its output.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override TextSpanner #'edge-text = #'("bla" . "blu")
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\override TextSpanner #'dash-period = #2
\override TextSpanner #'dash-fraction = #0.0
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\revert TextSpanner #'style
\override TextSpanner #'style = #'dashed-line \override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'left #'text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . 1) }
\override TextSpanner #'bound-details #'right #'text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . -2) }
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-13
\override TextSpanner #'dash-period = #10
\override TextSpanner #'dash-fraction = #0.5
\override TextSpanner #'thickness = #10
a \startTextSpan
b c
a \stopTextSpan
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-6
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="97/lily-494f79c2.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="97/lily-494f79c2.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="custodes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Custodes</h3>
<p>Custodes may be engraved in various styles.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
\new Staff \with { \consists "Custos_engraver" } \relative c' {
\override Staff.Custos #'neutral-position = #4
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'hufnagel
c1^"hufnagel" \break
<d a' f'>1
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'medicaea
c1^"medicaea" \break
<d a' f'>1
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'vaticana
c1^"vaticana" \break
<d a' f'>1
\override Staff.Custos #'style = #'mensural
c1^"mensural" \break
<d a' f'>1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9c/lily-d7f7902b.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9c/lily-d7f7902b.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="customizing-fretboard-fret-diagrams.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Customizing fretboard fret diagrams</h3>
<p>Fret diagram properties can be set through
<code>fret-diagram-details</code>. For FretBoard fret diagrams,
overrides are applied to the <code>FretBoards.FretBoard</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode { c' }
#guitar-tuning
#"x;1-1-(;3-2;3-3;3-4;1-1-);"
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode { c1 c c d }
}
\context FretBoards {
% Set global properties of fret diagram
\override FretBoards.FretBoard #'size = #'1.2
\override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'finger-code = #'in-dot
\override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-color = #'white
\chordmode {
c
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'size = #'1.0
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'barre-type = #'straight
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-color = #'black
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'finger-code = #'below-string
c'
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'barre-type = #'none
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'number-type = #'arabic
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'orientation = #'landscape
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'mute-string = #"M"
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'label-dir = #-1
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-color = #'black
c'
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'finger-code = #'below-string
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-radius = #0.35
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-position = #0.5
\once \override FretBoards.FretBoard #'fret-diagram-details
#'fret-count = #3
d
}
}
\context Voice {
c'1 c' c' d'
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="25/lily-db5de719.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="25/lily-db5de719.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="customizing-markup-fret-diagrams.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Customizing markup fret diagrams</h3>
<p>Fret diagram properties can be set through
<code>fret-diagram-details</code>. For markup fret diagrams, overrides
can be applied to the <code>Voice.TextScript</code> object or directly
to the markup.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\chords { c1 c c d }
\new Voice = "mel" {
\textLengthOn
% Set global properties of fret diagram
\override Voice.TextScript #'size = #'1.2
\override Voice.TextScript #'fret-diagram-details
#'finger-code = #'in-dot
\override Voice.TextScript #'fret-diagram-details
#'dot-color = #'white
%% C major for guitar, no barre, using defaults
% terse style
c'1^\markup { \fret-diagram-terse #"x;3-3;2-2;o;1-1;o;" }
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
% size 1.0
% roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre
c'1^\markup {
% standard size
\override #'(size . 1.0) {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(number-type . roman-lower)
(finger-code . in-dot)
(barre-type . straight))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
}
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
% landscape orientation, arabic numbers, M for mute string
% no barre, fret label down or left, small mute label font
c'1^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(finger-code . below-string)
(number-type . arabic)
(label-dir . -1)
(mute-string . "M")
(orientation . landscape)
(barre-type . none)
(xo-font-magnification . 0.4)
(xo-padding . 0.3))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
%% simple D chord
% terse style
% larger dots, centered dots, fewer frets
% label below string
d'1^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(finger-code . below-string)
(dot-radius . 0.35)
(dot-position . 0.5)
(fret-count . 3))) {
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;"
}
}
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b0/lily-97afdcd2.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b0/lily-97afdcd2.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="display-bracket-with-only-one-staff-in-a-system.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Display bracket with only one staff in a system</h3>
<p>If there is only one staff in one of the staff types
<code>ChoirStaff</code>, <code>InnerChoirStaff</code>, <code>InnerStaffGroup</code>
or <code>StaffGroup</code>, the bracket and the starting bar line will not
be displayed as standard behavior. This can be changed by overriding
the relevant properties, as demonstrated in this example.
<p>Note that in contexts such as <code>PianoStaff</code> and <code>GrandStaff</code>
where the systems begin with a brace instead of a bracket, another
property has to be set, as shown on the second system in the example.
<pre class="verbatim">
\markup \column {
\score {
\new StaffGroup <<
% Must be lower than the actual number of staff lines
\override StaffGroup.SystemStartBracket #'collapse-height = #1
\override Score.SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #1
\new Staff {
c'1
}
>>
\layout { }
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\override PianoStaff.SystemStartBrace #'collapse-height = #1
\override Score.SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #1
\new Staff {
c'1
}
>>
\layout { }
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="60/lily-892f5d56.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="60/lily-892f5d56.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="drawing-boxes-around-grobs.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Drawing boxes around grobs</h3>
<p>The <code>print-function</code> can be overridden to draw a box around an
arbitrary grob.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override TextScript #'stencil =
#(make-stencil-boxer 0.1 0.3 ly:text-interface::print)
c'4^"foo"
\override Stem #'stencil =
#(make-stencil-boxer 0.05 0.25 ly:stem::print)
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'stencil =
#(make-stencil-boxer 0.15 0.3 ly:text-interface::print)
b8
\revert Stem #'stencil
c4. c4 \mark "F" c1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a4/lily-4cc83e34.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a4/lily-4cc83e34.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="drawing-circles-around-various-objects.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Drawing circles around various objects</h3>
<p>The <code>\circle</code> command allows you to draw circles around various objects,
for example fingering indications. However, some objects require
specific tweaks: rehearsal marks depend on the <code>Score.markFormatter</code>
context, bar numbers on the <code>Score.BarNumber</code> context, and so on.
<p>You can tweak the printing of your circles by setting some properties
such as <code>#'thickness</code>, <code>#'circle-padding</code> or <code>#'font-size</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
c1
\set Score.markFormatter =
#(lambda (mark context)
(make-circle-markup (format-mark-numbers mark context)))
\mark \default
c2 d^\markup { \circle \finger 2 }
\override Score.BarNumber #'break-visibility = #all-visible
\override Score.BarNumber #'stencil =
#(make-stencil-circler 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print)
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="82/lily-20c415ca.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="82/lily-20c415ca.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="fine-tuning-pedal-brackets.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Fine-tuning pedal brackets</h3>
<p>For fine-tuning the appearance of a pedal bracket, the properties
<code>edge-width</code>, <code>edge-height</code>, and <code>shorten-pair</code> of
<code>PianoPedalBracket</code> objects can be modified. For example, the
bracket may be extended to the right edge of the note head:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override Staff.PianoPedalBracket #'shorten-pair = #'(0 . -1.0)
c4\sostenutoOn d e c,
f4 g a2\sostenutoOff
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="38/lily-ae6927a2.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="38/lily-ae6927a2.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="forcing-horizontal-shift-of-notes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Forcing horizontal shift of notes</h3>
<p>When the typesetting engine cannot cope, the <code>force-hshift</code>
property of the <code>NoteColumn</code> object can be used to override
typesetting decisions. The measure units used here are staff spaces.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' <<
{
<d g>2 <d g>
}
\\
{ <b f'>2
\once \override NoteColumn #'force-hshift = #1.7
<b f'>2
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="1b/lily-041be501.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="1b/lily-041be501.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="fret-diagrams-explained-and-developed.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Fret diagrams explained and developed</h3>
<p>This snippet shows many possibilities for obtaining
and tweaking fret diagrams.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\chords {
a2 a
c2 c
d1
}
\new Voice = "mel" {
\textLengthOn
% Set global properties of fret diagram
\override Voice.TextScript #'size = #1.2
\override Voice.TextScript #'fret-diagram-details #'finger-code = #'below-string
\override Voice.TextScript #'fret-diagram-details #'dot-color = #'black
%% A chord for ukelele
a'2^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(string-count . 4)
(dot-color . white)
(finger-code . in-dot))) {
\fret-diagram #"4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;"
}
}
%% A chord for ukelele, with formatting defined in definition string
% 1.2 * size, 4 strings, 4 frets, fingerings below string
% dot radius .35 of fret spacing, dot position 0.55 of fret spacing
a'2^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(dot-color . white)
(open-string . "o"))) {
\fret-diagram #"s:1.2;w:4;h:3;f:2;d:0.35;p:0.55;4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;"
}
}
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
% roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre
c'2^\markup {
% 110% of default size
\override #'(size . 1.1) {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(number-type . roman-lower)
(finger-code . below-string)
(barre-type . straight))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
}
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
c'2^\markup {
% 110% of default size
\override #'(size . 1.1) {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(number-type . arabic)
(dot-label-font-mag . 0.9)
(finger-code . in-dot)
(fret-label-font-mag . 0.6)
(fret-label-vertical-offset . 0)
(label-dir . -1)
(mute-string . "M")
(orientation . landscape)
(xo-font-magnification . 0.4)
(xo-padding . 0.3))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
}
%% simple D chord
d'1^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(finger-code . below-string)
(dot-radius . 0.35)
(dot-position . 0.5)
(fret-count . 3))) {
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;"
}
}
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a3/lily-807ee76a.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a3/lily-807ee76a.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="horizontally-aligning-custom-dynamics-e.g.-sempre-pp,-piu-f,-subito-p.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Horizontally aligning custom dynamics (e.g. "sempre pp", "piu f", "subito p")</h3>
<p>Some dynamic expressions involve additional text, like "sempre pp".
Since lilypond aligns all dynamics centered on the note, the \pp would
be displayed way after the note it applies to.
<p>To correctly align the "sempre \pp" horizontally, so that it is
aligned as if it were only the \pp, there are several approaches:
<p>* Simply use <code>\once\override DynamicText #'X-offset = #-9.2</code>
before the note with the dynamics to manually shift it to the correct
position. Drawback: This has to be done manually each time you use that
dynamic markup... * Add some padding (<code>#:hspace 7.1</code>) into the
definition of your custom dynamic mark, so that after lilypond
center-aligns it, it is already correctly aligned. Drawback: The
padding really takes up that space and does not allow any other markup
or dynamics to be shown in that position.
<p>* Shift the dynamic script <code>\once\override ... #'X-offset = ..</code>.
Drawback: <code>\once\override</code> is needed for every invocation!
<p>* Set the dimensions of the additional text to 0 (using
<code>#:with-dimensions '(0 . 0) '(0 . 0)</code>). Drawback: To lilypond
"sempre" has no extent, so it might put other stuff there and create
collisions (which are not detected by the collision dection!). Also,
there seems to be some spacing, so it's not exactly the same alignment
as without the additional text
<p>* Add an explicit shifting directly inside the scheme function for the
dynamic-script.
<p>* Set an explicit alignment inside the dynamic-script. By default, this
won't have any effect, only if one sets X-offset! Drawback: One needs
to set <code>DynamicText #'X-offset</code>, which will apply to all dynamic
texts! Also, it is aligned at the right edge of the additional text,
not at the center of pp.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header { title = "Horizontally aligning custom dynamics" }
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
% Solution 1: Using a simple markup with a particular halign value
% Drawback: It's a markup, not a dynamic command, so \dynamicDown etc. will have no effect
semppMarkup = \markup { \halign #1.4 \italic "sempre" \dynamic "pp" }
% Solution 2: Using a dynamic script and shifting with \once\override ... #'X-offset = ..
% Drawback: \once\override needed for every invocation
semppK = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line( #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp")))
% Solution 3: Padding the dynamic script so the center-alignment puts it to the correct position
% Drawback: the padding really reserves the space, nothing else can be there
semppT = #(
make-dynamic-script (
markup #:line (
#:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp" #:hspace 7.1
)
)
)
% Solution 4: Dynamic, setting the dimensions of the additional text to 0
% Drawback: To lilypond "sempre" has no extent, so it might put other stuff there => collisions
% Drawback: Also, there seems to be some spacing, so it's not exactly the
% same alignment as without the additional text
semppM = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line( #:with-dimensions '(0 . 0) '(0 . 0) #:right-align #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp")))
% Solution 5: Dynamic with explicit shifting inside the scheme function
semppG = #(make-dynamic-script
(markup
#:hspace 0 #:translate (cons -18.85 0 )
#:line( #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))
)
% Solution 6: Dynamic with explicit alignment. This has only effect, if one sets X-offset!
% Drawback: One needs to set DynamicText #'X-offset!
% Drawback: Aligned at the right edge of the additional text, not at the center of pp
semppMII = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line(#:right-align #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp")))
\context StaffGroup <<
\context Staff="s" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Normal"
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4\pp c\p c c | c\ff c c\pp c }
>>
\context Staff="sMarkup" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Normal" "Markup"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4-\semppMarkup c\p c c | c\ff c c-\semppMarkup c}
>>
\context Staff="sK" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Explicit" "shifting"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major
\once \override DynamicText #'X-offset = #-9.2 c4\semppK c\p c c |
c\ff c \once \override DynamicText #'X-offset = #-9.2 c\semppK c }
>>
\context Staff="sT" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Right" "padding"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppT c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppT c }
>>
\context Staff="sM" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Setting" "dimension" "to zero"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppM c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppM c }
>>
\context Staff="sG" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Shifting" "inside" "dynamics"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppG c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppG c}
>>
\context Staff="sMII" << \set Staff.instrumentName = \markup\column{"Alignment" "inside" "dynamics"}
\relative c'' { \key es \major
\override DynamicText #'X-offset = #0 % Setting to ##f (false) gives the same resul
c4\semppMII c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppMII c }
>>
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b8/lily-c29942a1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b8/lily-c29942a1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="how-to-change-fret-diagram-position.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">How to change fret diagram position</h3>
<p>If you want to move the position of a fret diagram, for example, to
avoid collision, or to place it between two notes, you have various
possibilities:
<p>1) modify #'padding or #'extra-offset values (as shown in the first
snippet)
<p>2) you can add an invisible voice and attach the fret diagrams to the
invisible notes in that voice (as shown in the second example).
<p>If you need to move the fret according with a rythmic position inside
the bar (in the example, the third beat of the measure) the second
example is better, because the fret is aligned with the third beat
itself.
<pre class="verbatim">
harmonies = \chordmode
{
a8:13
% THE FOLLOWING IS THE COMMAND TO MOVE THE CHORD NAME
\once \override ChordNames.ChordName #'extra-offset = #'(10 . 0)
b8:13 s2.
% THIS LINE IS THE SECOND METHOD
s4 s4 b4:13
}
\score
{
<<
\context ChordNames \harmonies
\context Staff
{a8^\markup { \fret-diagram #"6-x;5-0;4-2;3-0;2-0;1-2;" }
% THE FOLLOWING IS THE COMMAND TO MOVE THE FRET DIAGRAM
\once \override TextScript #'extra-offset = #'(10 . 0)
b4.~^\markup { \fret-diagram #"6-x;5-2;4-4;3-2;2-2;1-4;" } b4. a8\break
% HERE IS THE SECOND METHOD
<<
{ a8 b4.~ b4. a8}
{ s4 s4 s4^\markup { \fret-diagram #"6-x;5-2;4-4;3-2;2-2;1-4;" }
}
>>
}
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e8/lily-3ffb84ab.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e8/lily-3ffb84ab.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="inserting-a-caesura.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Inserting a caesura</h3>
<p>Caesura marks can be created by overriding the <code>'text</code>
property of the <code>BreathingSign</code> object. A curved caesura
mark is also available.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override BreathingSign #'text =
#(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.caesura.straight")
c8 e4. \breathe g8. e16 c4
\override BreathingSign #'text =
#(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.caesura.curved")
g8 e'4. \breathe g8. e16 c4
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="be/lily-8eab70c5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="be/lily-8eab70c5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="making-an-object-invisible-with-the-transparent-property.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Making an object invisible with the transparent property</h3>
<p>Setting the <code>transparent</code> property will cause an object to be
printed in "invisible ink": the object is not printed, but all its
other behavior is retained. The object still takes up space, it takes
part in collisions, and slurs, ties and beams can be attached to it.
<p>This snippet demonstrates how to connect different voices using ties.
Normally, ties only connect two notes in the same voice. By
introducing a tie in a different voice, and blanking the first up-stem
in that voice, the tie appears to cross voices. To prevent the blanked stem's
flag from interfering with tie positioning, the stem is extended.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\time 2/4
<< {
\once \override Stem #'transparent = ##t
\once \override Stem #'length = #8
b8 ~ b\noBeam
\once \override Stem #'transparent = ##t
\once \override Stem #'length = #8
g8 ~ g\noBeam
} \\ {
b8 g g e
} >>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="74/lily-ed1461a4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="74/lily-ed1461a4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="manually-controlling-beam-positions.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Manually controlling beam positions</h3>
<p>Beam positions may be controlled manually, by overriding the
<code>positions</code> setting of the <code>Beam</code> grob.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\time 2/4
% from upper staffline (position 4) to center (position 0)
\override Beam #'positions = #'(2 . 0)
c8 c
% from center to one above center (position 2)
\override Beam #'positions = #'(0 . 1)
c8 c
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="5f/lily-7c61b35b.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="5f/lily-7c61b35b.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="mensurstriche-layout-bar-lines-between-the-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Mensurstriche layout (bar lines between the staves)</h3>
<p>The mensurstriche-layout where the bar lines do not show on the staves
but between staves can be achieved with a <code>StaffGroup</code> instead of
a <code>ChoirStaff</code>. The bar line on staves is blanked out by setting
the <code>transparent</code> property.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##t
s1 s
% the final bar line is not interrupted
\revert Staff.BarLine #'transparent
\bar "|."
}
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
<<
\new Staff { << \global { c1 c } >> }
\new Staff { << \global { c c } >> }
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="d4/lily-0139e5aa.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="d4/lily-0139e5aa.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="nesting-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Nesting staves</h3>
<p>The property <code>systemStartDelimiterHierarchy</code> can be used to make
more complex nested staff groups. The command <code>\set
StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy</code> takes an alphabetical list of
the number of staves produced. Before each staff a system start
delimiter can be given. It has to be enclosed in brackets and takes as
much staves as the brackets enclose. Elements in the list can be
omitted, but the first bracket takes always the complete number of
staves. The possibilities are <code>SystemStartBar</code>,
<code>SystemStartBracket</code>, <code>SystemStartBrace</code>, and
<code>SystemStartSquare</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\new StaffGroup
\relative c'' <<
\set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy
= #'(SystemStartSquare (SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a
(SystemStartSquare b) ) c ) d)
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c2/lily-70d9e59c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c2/lily-70d9e59c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="positioning-multi--measure-rests.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Positioning multi-measure rests</h3>
<p>Unlike ordinary rests, there is no predefined command
to change the vertical position on the staff of a multi-measure
rest symbol of either form by attaching it to a note. However,
in polyphonic music multi-measure rests in odd-numbered and
even-numbered voices are vertically separated. The positioning
of multi-measure rests can be controlled as follows:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
% Multi-measure rests by default are set under the second line
R1
% They can be moved with an override
\override MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position = #-2
R1
% A value of 0 is the default position;
% the following trick moves the rest to the center line
\override MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position = #-0.01
R1
% Multi-measure rests in odd-numbered voices are under the top line
<< { R1 } \\ { a1 } >>
% Multi-measure rests in even-numbered voices are under the bottom line
<< { c1 } \\ { R1 } >>
% They remain separated even in empty measures
<< { R1 } \\ { R1 } >>
% This brings them together even though there are two voices
\compressFullBarRests
<<
\revert MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position
{ R1*3 }
\\
\revert MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position
{ R1*3 }
>>
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="73/lily-ebd099b8.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="73/lily-ebd099b8.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-a-repeat-sign-at-the-beginning-of-a-piece.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing a repeat sign at the beginning of a piece</h3>
<p>A <code>|:</code> bar line can be printed at the beginning of a piece, by
overriding the relevant property:
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\once \override Score.BreakAlignment #'break-align-orders =
#(make-vector 3 '(instrument-name
left-edge
ambitus
span-bar
breathing-sign
clef
key-signature
time-signature
staff-bar
custos
span-bar))
\bar "|:"
c1
d1
d4 e f g
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f9/lily-8304a96e.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f9/lily-8304a96e.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="printing-metronome-and-rehearsal-marks-below-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Printing metronome and rehearsal marks below the staff</h3>
<p>By default, metronome and rehearsal marks are printed above the staff.
To place them below the staff simply set the <code>direction</code> property
of <code>MetronomeMark</code> or <code>RehearsalMark</code> appropriately.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
{
% Metronome marks below the staff
\override Score.MetronomeMark #'direction = #DOWN
\tempo 8. = 120
c''1
% Rehearsal marks below the staff
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'direction = #DOWN
\mark \default
c''1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4a/lily-cfdefdd1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4a/lily-cfdefdd1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="proportional-strict-notespacing.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Proportional strict notespacing</h3>
<p>If <code>strict-note-spacing</code> is set spacing of notes is not influenced
by bars or clefs within a system. Rather, they are placed just before
the note that occurs at the same time. This may cause collisions.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
ragged-right = ##t
}
\relative c'' <<
\override Score.SpacingSpanner #'strict-note-spacing = ##t
\set Score.proportionalNotationDuration = #(ly:make-moment 1 16)
\new Staff {
c8[ c \clef alto c c \grace { d16 } c8 c] c4
c2 \grace { c16[ c16] } c2
}
\new Staff {
c2 \times 2/3 { c8 \clef bass cis,, c } c4
c1
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="7b/lily-72ebb147.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="7b/lily-72ebb147.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="removing-the-first-empty-line.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Removing the first empty line</h3>
<p>The first empty staff can also be removed from the score by setting the
<code>VerticalAxisGroup</code> property <code>remove-first</code>. This can be done
globally inside the <code>\layout</code> block, or locally inside the
specific staff that should be removed. In the latter case, you have to
specify the context (<code>Staff</code> applies only to the current staff) in
front of the property.
<p>The lower staff of the second staff group is not removed, because the
setting applies only to the specific staff inside of which it is
written.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
\context {
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext
% To use the setting globally, uncomment the following line:
% \override VerticalAxisGroup #'remove-first = ##t
}
}
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \relative c' {
e4 f g a \break
c1
}
\new Staff {
% To use the setting globally, comment this line,
% uncomment the line in the \layout block above
\override Staff.VerticalAxisGroup #'remove-first = ##t
R1 \break
R
}
>>
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \relative c' {
e4 f g a \break
c1
}
\new Staff {
R1 \break
R
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="e7/lily-3d411fb4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="e7/lily-3d411fb4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="rest-styles.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Rest styles</h3>
<p>Rests may be used in various styles.
<pre class="verbatim">
\layout {
indent = 0.0
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
}
}
\relative c {
\set Score.timing = ##f
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'mensural
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { mensural }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'neomensural
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { neomensural }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'classical
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { classical }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'default
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { default }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r128
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b4/lily-5bfcd48c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b4/lily-5bfcd48c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="rhythmic-slashes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Rhythmic slashes</h3>
<p>In "simple" lead-sheets, sometimes no actual notes are written,
instead only "rhythmic patterns" and chords above the measures are
notated giving the structure of a song. Such a feature is for example
useful while creating/transcribing the structure of a song and also
when sharing lead sheets with guitarists or jazz musicians. The
standard support for this using <code>\repeat percent</code> is unsuitable
here since the first beat has to be an ordinary note or rest. This
example shows two solutions to this problem, by redefining ordinary
rests to be printed as slashes. (If the duration of each beat is not a
quarter note, replace the <code>r4</code> in the definitions with a rest of
the appropriate duration).
<pre class="verbatim">
% Macro to print single slash
rs = {
\once \override Rest #'stencil = #ly:percent-repeat-item-interface::beat-slash
\once \override Rest #'thickness = #'0.48
\once \override Rest #'slope = #'1.7
r4
}
% Function to print a specified number of slashes
comp = #(define-music-function (parser location count) ( integer?)
#{
\override Rest #'stencil = #ly:percent-repeat-item-interface::beat-slash
\override Rest #'thickness = #'0.48
\override Rest #'slope = #'1.7
\repeat unfold $count { r4 }
\revert Rest #'stencil
#}
)
\score{
\relative c' {
c d e f |
\rs \rs \rs \rs |
\comp #4 |
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="65/lily-23b8cebf.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="65/lily-23b8cebf.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="suppressing-warnings-for-clashing-note-columns.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Suppressing warnings for clashing note columns</h3>
<p>If notes from two voices with stems in the same direction are
placed at the same position, and both voices have no shift or the
same shift specified, the error message "warning: ignoring too
many clashing note columns" will appear when compiling the
LilyPond file. This message can be suppressed by setting the
<code>'ignore-collision</code> property of the <code>NoteColumn</code> object
to <code>#t</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
ignore = \override NoteColumn #'ignore-collision = ##t
\relative c' <<
\ignore
{ \stemDown f2 g } \\
{ c2 c, }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="28/lily-74c9287c.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="28/lily-74c9287c.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="time-signature-in-parentheses.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Time signature in parentheses</h3>
<p>The time signature can be enclosed within parentheses.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c'' {
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = #(lambda (grob)
(bracketify-stencil (ly:time-signature::print grob) Y 0.1 0.2 0.1))
\time 2/4
a4 b8 c
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-bb42503d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-bb42503d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="tweaking-clef-properties.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Tweaking clef properties</h3>
<p>The command <code>\clef "treble_8"</code> is equivalent to setting
<code>clefGlyph</code>, <code>clefPosition</code> (which controls the vertical
position of the clef), <code>middleCPosition</code> and
<code>clefOctavation</code>. A clef is printed when any of the properties
except <code>middleCPosition</code> are changed.
<p>Note that changing the glyph, the position of the clef, or the
octavation does not in itself change the position of subsequent notes
on the staff: the position of middle C must also be specified to do
this. The positional parameters are relative to the staff center line,
positive numbers displacing upwards, counting one for each line and
space. The <code>clefOctavation</code> value would normally be set to 7, -7,
15 or -15, but other values are valid.
<p>When a clef change takes place at a line break the new clef symbol is
printed at both the end of the previous line and the beginning of the
new line by default. If the warning clef at the end of the previous
line is not required it can be suppressed by setting the <code>Staff</code>
property <code>explicitClefVisibility</code> to the value
<code>end-of-line-invisible</code>. The default behavior can be recovered
with <code>\unset Staff.explicitClefVisibility</code>.
<p>The following examples show the possibilities when setting these
properties manually. On the first line, the manual changes preserve the
standard relative positioning of clefs and notes, whereas on the second
line, they do not.
<pre class="verbatim">
{
% The default treble clef
c'1
% The standard bass clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.F"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #2
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #6
c'1
% The baritone clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.C"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #4
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #4
c'1
% The standard choral tenor clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.G"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #-2
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #-7
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #1
c'1
% A non-standard clef
\set Staff.clefPosition = #0
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #0
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-4
c'1 \break
% The following clef changes do not preserve
% the normal relationship between notes and clefs:
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.F"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #2
c'1
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.G"
c'1
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.C"
c'1
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #7
c'1
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #0
\set Staff.clefPosition = #0
c'1
% Here we go back to the normal clef:
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #0
c'1
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="60/lily-919dc097.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="60/lily-919dc097.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="using-the--tweak-command-to-tweak-individual-grobs.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Using the <code>\tweak</code> command to tweak individual grobs</h3>
<p>With the <code>\tweak</code> command, every grob can be tuned directly. Here
are some examples of available tweaks.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
\time 2/4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(right)
<
\tweak #'font-size #3 c
\tweak #'color #red d-\tweak #'font-size #8 -4
\tweak #'style #'cross g
\tweak #'duration-log #2 a
>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="fc/lily-1163b2bd.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="fc/lily-1163b2bd.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vertically-aligned-dynamics-and-textscripts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vertically aligned dynamics and textscripts</h3>
<p>By setting the <code>Y-extent</code> property to a suitable value, all
<code>DynamicLineSpanner</code> objects (hairpins and dynamic texts) can be
aligned to a common reference point, regardless of their actual extent.
This way, every element will be vertically aligned, thus producing a
more pleasing output.
<p>The same idea is used to align the text scripts along their baseline.
<pre class="verbatim">
music = \relative c'' {
c2\p^\markup { gorgeous } c\f^\markup { fantastic }
c4\p c\f\> c c\!\p
}
{
\music \break
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'staff-padding = #2.0
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'Y-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5)
\override TextScript #'Y-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5)
\music
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="58/lily-531c047d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="58/lily-531c047d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vertically-aligning-ossias-and-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vertically aligning ossias and lyrics</h3>
<p>This snippet demonstrates the use of the context properties
<code>alignBelowContext</code> and <code>alignAboveContext</code> to control the
positioning of lyrics and ossias.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
ragged-right = ##t
}
\relative c' <<
\new Staff = "1" { c4 c s2 }
\new Staff = "2" { c4 c s2 }
\new Staff = "3" { c4 c s2 }
{ \skip 2
<<
\lyrics {
\set alignBelowContext = #"1"
lyrics4 below
}
\new Staff \with {
alignAboveContext = #"3"
fontSize = #-2
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -2)
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
} {
\times 4/6 {
\override TextScript #'padding = #3
c8^"ossia above" d e d e f
}
}
>>
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-7de9f8d7.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-7de9f8d7.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Paper-and-layout"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Paper and layout</h2>
<!-- FIXME not precise enough reference? -->
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Spacing-issues">Spacing issues</a>.
<p><a name="aligning-and-centering-instrument-names.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Aligning and centering instrument names</h3>
<p>Instrument names are generally printed to the left of the staves. To
align the names of several different intruments, put them in a
<code>\markup</code> block and use one of the following possibilites:
<p>*
Right-aligned instrument names: this is the default behavior
<p>*
Center-aligned instrument names: using the <code>\hcenter-in #n</code>
command
places the instrument names inside a padded box, with <code>n</code> being
the width
of the box
<p>*
Left-aligned instrument names: the names are printed on top of an
empty box, using the <code>\combine</code> command
with an <code>\hspace #n</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
indent = #0
left-margin = #30
line-width = #160
}
\new StaffGroup \relative c' <<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Piccolo"
c1^"default" | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \hcenter-in #10 Piccolo }
c1^"centered" | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \combine \hspace #8 Piccolo }
c1^"left-aligned" | c
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Flute"
c1 | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \hcenter-in #10 Flute }
c1 | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \combine \hspace #8 Flute }
c1 | c
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="58/lily-3fb556c3.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="58/lily-3fb556c3.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="alignment-vertical-spacing.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Alignment vertical spacing</h3>
<p>By setting properties in <code>NonMusicalPaperColumn</code>, vertical spacing
can be adjusted per system.
<p>By setting <code>alignment-extra-space</code> or
<code>fixed-alignment-extra-space</code> an individual system may be
stretched vertically.
<p>For technical reasons, <code>\overrideProperty</code> must be used for
changing these properties within a staff; <code>\override</code> in a
<code>\context</code> block may still be used for global overrides.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-global-staff-size 13)
\relative c''
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff {
c1 \break
c1 \break
c1 \break
}
\new Staff {
c1 | c | c
}
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Voice {
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"piano"
\set PianoStaff.shortInstrumentName = #"pn"
c1_"normal"
\overrideProperty
#"Score.NonMusicalPaperColumn"
#'line-break-system-details
#'((fixed-alignment-extra-space . 15))
c_"fixed-aligment-extra-space"
\overrideProperty
#"Score.NonMusicalPaperColumn"
#'line-break-system-details
#'((alignment-extra-space . 15))
c_"aligment-extra-space"
}
{ c1 | c | c }
>>
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9c/lily-a3881ca4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9c/lily-a3881ca4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="changing-the-staff-size.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing the staff size</h3>
<p>Though the simplest way to resize staves is to use
<code>#(set-global-staff-size xx)</code>, an individual staff's size can be
changed by scaling the properties <code>staff-space</code> and
<code>fontSize</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
<<
\new Staff \relative c'' {
\dynamicDown
c8\ff c c c c c c c
}
\new Staff \with {
fontSize = #-3
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -3)
} {
\clef bass
c8 c c c c\f c c c
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="33/lily-eb10503d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="33/lily-eb10503d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="clip-systems.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Clip systems</h3>
<p>This code shows how to clip (extract) snippets from a full score.
<p>This file needs to be run separately with <code>-dclip-systems</code>; the
snippets page may not adequately show the results.
<p>The result will be files named
<samp><var>base</var><span class="file">-from-</span><var>start</var><span class="file">-to-</span><var>end</var><span class="file">[-</span><var>count</var><span class="file">].eps</span></samp>.
<ul>
<li>If system starts and ends are included, they include extents of the
System grob, e.g., instrument names.
<li>Grace notes at the end point of the region are not included.
<li>Regions can span multiple systems. In this case, multiple EPS files
are generated.
</ul>
<pre class="verbatim">
#(ly:set-option 'clip-systems)
#(set! output-count 1)
origScore = \score {
\relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"bla"
c1
d1
\grace c16 e1
\key d \major
f1 \break
\clef bass
g,1
fis1
}
}
\book {
\score {
\origScore
\layout {
% Each clip-region is a (START . END) pair
% where both are rhythmic-locations.
% (make-rhythmic-locations BAR-NUMBER NUM DEN)
% means NUM/DEN whole-notes into bar numbered BAR-NUMBER
clip-regions = #(list
(cons
(make-rhythmic-location 2 0 1)
(make-rhythmic-location 4 0 1))
(cons
(make-rhythmic-location 0 0 1)
(make-rhythmic-location 4 0 1))
(cons
(make-rhythmic-location 0 0 1)
(make-rhythmic-location 6 0 1))
)
}
}
}
#(set! output-count 0)
#(ly:set-option 'clip-systems #f)
\book {
\score { \origScore }
\markup { \bold \fontsize #6 clips }
\score {
\lyrics {
\markup { from-2.0.1-to-4.0.1-clip.eps }
\markup {
\epsfile #X #30.0 #(format #f "~a-1-from-2.0.1-to-4.0.1-clip.eps"
(ly:parser-output-name parser)) }
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="33/lily-3f043528.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="33/lily-3f043528.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="creating-blank-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Creating blank staves</h3>
<p>To create blank staves, generate empty measures then remove the
<code>Bar_number_engraver</code> from the <code>Score</code> context, and the
<code>Time_signature_engraver</code>, <code>Clef_engraver</code> and
<code>Bar_engraver</code> from the <code>Staff</code> context.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-global-staff-size 20)
\score {
{
\repeat unfold 12 { s1 \break }
}
\layout {
indent = 0\in
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Clef_engraver"
\remove "Bar_engraver"
}
\context {
\Score
\remove "Bar_number_engraver"
}
}
}
\paper {
#(set-paper-size "letter")
ragged-last-bottom = ##f
line-width = 7.5\in
left-margin = 0.5\in
bottom-margin = 0.25\in
top-margin = 0.25\in
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="63/lily-e0186df5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="63/lily-e0186df5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="demonstrating-all-headers.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Demonstrating all headers</h3>
<p>All header fields with special meanings.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
copyright = "copyright"
title = "title"
subtitle = "subtitle"
composer = "composer"
arranger = "arranger"
instrument = "instrument"
metre = "metre"
opus = "opus"
piece = "piece"
poet = "poet"
texidoc = "All header fields with special meanings."
copyright = "public domain"
enteredby = "jcn"
source = "urtext"
}
\layout {
ragged-right = ##f
}
\score {
\relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c }
}
\score {
\relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c }
\header {
title = "localtitle"
subtitle = "localsubtitle"
composer = "localcomposer"
arranger = "localarranger"
instrument = "localinstrument"
metre = "localmetre"
opus = "localopus"
piece = "localpiece"
poet = "localpoet"
copyright = "localcopyright"
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="82/lily-bd13e6d5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="82/lily-bd13e6d5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="table-of-contents.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Table of contents</h3>
<p>A table of contents is included using
<code>\markuplines \table-of-contents</code><!-- /@w -->. The TOC items are
added with the <code>\tocItem</code> command.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-default-paper-size "a6")
\book {
\markuplines \table-of-contents
\pageBreak
\tocItem \markup { The first score }
\score {
{
c'1 \pageBreak
\mark "A" \tocItem \markup { Mark A }
d'1
}
}
\pageBreak
\tocItem \markup { The second score }
\score {
{ e'1 }
\header { piece = "Second score" }
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="46/lily-aacfa770.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="46/lily-aacfa770.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Titles"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Titles</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Titles-and-headers">Titles and headers</a>.
<p><a name="adding-the-current-date-to-a-score.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adding the current date to a score</h3>
<p>With a little Scheme code, the current date can easily be added to a
score.
<pre class="verbatim">
% first, define a variable to hold the formatted date:
date = #(strftime "%d-%m-%Y" (localtime (current-time)))
% use it in the title block:
\header {
title = "Including the date!"
subtitle = \date
}
\score {
\relative c'' {
c4 c c c
}
}
% and use it in a \markup block:
\markup {
\date
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="63/lily-ca026937.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="63/lily-ca026937.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="aligning-and-centering-instrument-names.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Aligning and centering instrument names</h3>
<p>Instrument names are generally printed to the left of the staves. To
align the names of several different intruments, put them in a
<code>\markup</code> block and use one of the following possibilites:
<p>*
Right-aligned instrument names: this is the default behavior
<p>*
Center-aligned instrument names: using the <code>\hcenter-in #n</code>
command
places the instrument names inside a padded box, with <code>n</code> being
the width
of the box
<p>*
Left-aligned instrument names: the names are printed on top of an
empty box, using the <code>\combine</code> command
with an <code>\hspace #n</code> object.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
indent = #0
left-margin = #30
line-width = #160
}
\new StaffGroup \relative c' <<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Piccolo"
c1^"default" | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \hcenter-in #10 Piccolo }
c1^"centered" | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \combine \hspace #8 Piccolo }
c1^"left-aligned" | c
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Flute"
c1 | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \hcenter-in #10 Flute }
c1 | c \break
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { \combine \hspace #8 Flute }
c1 | c
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="58/lily-3fb556c3.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="58/lily-3fb556c3.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="demonstrating-all-headers.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Demonstrating all headers</h3>
<p>All header fields with special meanings.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
copyright = "copyright"
title = "title"
subtitle = "subtitle"
composer = "composer"
arranger = "arranger"
instrument = "instrument"
metre = "metre"
opus = "opus"
piece = "piece"
poet = "poet"
texidoc = "All header fields with special meanings."
copyright = "public domain"
enteredby = "jcn"
source = "urtext"
}
\layout {
ragged-right = ##f
}
\score {
\relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c }
}
\score {
\relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c }
\header {
title = "localtitle"
subtitle = "localsubtitle"
composer = "localcomposer"
arranger = "localarranger"
instrument = "localinstrument"
metre = "localmetre"
opus = "localopus"
piece = "localpiece"
poet = "localpoet"
copyright = "localcopyright"
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="82/lily-bd13e6d5.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="82/lily-bd13e6d5.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Spacing"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Spacing</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#Spacing-issues">Spacing issues</a>.
<p><a name="adjusting-lyrics-vertical-spacing.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Adjusting lyrics vertical spacing</h3>
<p>This snippet shows how to bring the lyrics line closer to the staff.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Default layout:
<<
\new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' {
c4 d e f
g4 f e d
c1
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa }
% Reducing the minimum space below the staff and above the lyrics:
\new Staff \with {
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1 . 4)
}
\new Voice = melody \relative c' {
c4 d e f
g4 f e d
c1
}
\new Lyrics \with {
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1.2 . 1)
}
\lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa }
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="25/lily-be0a47ca.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="25/lily-be0a47ca.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="alignment-vertical-spacing.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Alignment vertical spacing</h3>
<p>By setting properties in <code>NonMusicalPaperColumn</code>, vertical spacing
can be adjusted per system.
<p>By setting <code>alignment-extra-space</code> or
<code>fixed-alignment-extra-space</code> an individual system may be
stretched vertically.
<p>For technical reasons, <code>\overrideProperty</code> must be used for
changing these properties within a staff; <code>\override</code> in a
<code>\context</code> block may still be used for global overrides.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-global-staff-size 13)
\relative c''
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff {
c1 \break
c1 \break
c1 \break
}
\new Staff {
c1 | c | c
}
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Voice {
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"piano"
\set PianoStaff.shortInstrumentName = #"pn"
c1_"normal"
\overrideProperty
#"Score.NonMusicalPaperColumn"
#'line-break-system-details
#'((fixed-alignment-extra-space . 15))
c_"fixed-aligment-extra-space"
\overrideProperty
#"Score.NonMusicalPaperColumn"
#'line-break-system-details
#'((alignment-extra-space . 15))
c_"aligment-extra-space"
}
{ c1 | c | c }
>>
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="9c/lily-a3881ca4.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="9c/lily-a3881ca4.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="allowing-fingerings-to-be-printed-inside-the-staff.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Allowing fingerings to be printed inside the staff</h3>
<p>By default, fingering numbers will be printed outside the staff.
However, this behavior can be canceled.
<pre class="verbatim">
\relative c' {
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
\once \override Fingering #'staff-padding = #'()
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="51/lily-3f70c2ad.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="51/lily-3f70c2ad.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="page-label.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Page label</h3>
<p>Page labels may be placed inside music or at top-level,
and referred to in markups.
<pre class="verbatim">
#(set-default-paper-size "a6")
#(define-markup-command (toc-line layout props label text) (symbol? markup?)
(interpret-markup layout props
(markup #:fill-line (text #:page-ref label "8" "?"))))
\book {
\markup \huge \fill-line { \null Title Page \null }
\pageBreak
\label #'toc
\markup \column {
\large \fill-line { \null Table of contents \null }
\toc-line #'toc "Table of contents"
\toc-line #'firstScore "First Score"
\toc-line #'markA "Mark A"
\toc-line #'markB "Mark B"
\toc-line #'markC "Mark C"
\toc-line #'unknown "Unknown label"
}
\pageBreak
\label #'firstScore
\score {
{
c'2 c'
\mark \markup { A (page \concat { \page-ref #'markA "0" "?" ) } } \label #'markA
c'2 c'
\pageBreak
\mark "B" \label #'markB
d'2 d'
d'2 d'
\once \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
\mark "C" \label #'markC
}
\header { piece = "First score" }
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="78/lily-f538e3cd.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="78/lily-f538e3cd.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="proportional-strict-notespacing.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Proportional strict notespacing</h3>
<p>If <code>strict-note-spacing</code> is set spacing of notes is not influenced
by bars or clefs within a system. Rather, they are placed just before
the note that occurs at the same time. This may cause collisions.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
ragged-right = ##t
}
\relative c'' <<
\override Score.SpacingSpanner #'strict-note-spacing = ##t
\set Score.proportionalNotationDuration = #(ly:make-moment 1 16)
\new Staff {
c8[ c \clef alto c c \grace { d16 } c8 c] c4
c2 \grace { c16[ c16] } c2
}
\new Staff {
c2 \times 2/3 { c8 \clef bass cis,, c } c4
c1
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="7b/lily-72ebb147.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="7b/lily-72ebb147.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vertically-aligned-dynamics-and-textscripts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vertically aligned dynamics and textscripts</h3>
<p>By setting the <code>Y-extent</code> property to a suitable value, all
<code>DynamicLineSpanner</code> objects (hairpins and dynamic texts) can be
aligned to a common reference point, regardless of their actual extent.
This way, every element will be vertically aligned, thus producing a
more pleasing output.
<p>The same idea is used to align the text scripts along their baseline.
<pre class="verbatim">
music = \relative c'' {
c2\p^\markup { gorgeous } c\f^\markup { fantastic }
c4\p c\f\> c c\!\p
}
{
\music \break
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'staff-padding = #2.0
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'Y-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5)
\override TextScript #'Y-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5)
\music
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="58/lily-531c047d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="58/lily-531c047d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vertically-aligning-ossias-and-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vertically aligning ossias and lyrics</h3>
<p>This snippet demonstrates the use of the context properties
<code>alignBelowContext</code> and <code>alignAboveContext</code> to control the
positioning of lyrics and ossias.
<pre class="verbatim">
\paper {
ragged-right = ##t
}
\relative c' <<
\new Staff = "1" { c4 c s2 }
\new Staff = "2" { c4 c s2 }
\new Staff = "3" { c4 c s2 }
{ \skip 2
<<
\lyrics {
\set alignBelowContext = #"1"
lyrics4 below
}
\new Staff \with {
alignAboveContext = #"3"
fontSize = #-2
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -2)
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
} {
\times 4/6 {
\override TextScript #'padding = #3
c8^"ossia above" d e d e f
}
}
>>
}
>>
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-7de9f8d7.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-7de9f8d7.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="MIDI"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">MIDI</h2>
<p>These snippets illustrate the Notation Reference,
section <a href="../../Documentation/user/lilypond.html#MIDI-output">MIDI output</a>.
<p><a name="changing-midi-output-to-one-channel-per-voice.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Changing MIDI output to one channel per voice</h3>
<p>When outputting MIDI, the default behavior is for each staff to
represent one MIDI channel, with all the voices on a staff amalgamated.
This minimizes the risk of running out of MIDI channels, since there
are only 16 available per track.
<p>However, by moving the <code>Staff_performer</code> to the <code>Voice</code>
context, each voice on a staff can have its own MIDI channel, as is
demonstrated by the following example: despite being on the same staff,
two MIDI channels are created, each with a different
<code>midiInstrument</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
\score {
\new Staff <<
\new Voice \relative c''' {
\set midiInstrument = #"flute"
\voiceOne
\key g \major
\time 2/2
r2 g-"Flute" ~
g fis ~
fis4 g8 fis e2 ~
e4 d8 cis d2
}
\new Voice \relative c'' {
\set midiInstrument = #"clarinet"
\voiceTwo
b1-"Clarinet"
a2. b8 a
g2. fis8 e
fis2 r
}
>>
\layout { }
\midi {
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Staff_performer"
}
\context {
\Voice
\consists "Staff_performer"
}
\context {
\Score
tempoWholesPerMinute = #(ly:make-moment 72 2)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8a/lily-042a2177.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8a/lily-042a2177.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="demo-midiinstruments.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Demo MidiInstruments</h3>
<p>Problem: How to know which <code>midiInstrument</code> would be best for your
composition? Solution: A LilyPond demo file.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
title = "Demo of all midi sounds"
arranger = "Myself "
}
basemelodie = \relative c' {
c4. \mf g c16 b' c d
e16 d e f g4 g'4 r
R1
}
melodie = { \tempo 4 = 150 \basemelodie }
\score {
\new Staff <<
\new Voice { \melodie
}
>>
\layout { }
}
\score {
\new Staff <<
%\set Staff.instrumentName= #"S/A"
%\set Staff.midiMinimumVolume = #0.2
%\set Staff.midiMaximumVolume = #0.4
%\set Voice.dynamicAbsoluteVolumeFunction = #0.6
\new Voice { r \mf
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic grand" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bright acoustic" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric grand" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"honky-tonk" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric piano 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric piano 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"harpsichord" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clav" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"celesta" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"glockenspiel" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"music box" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"vibraphone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"marimba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"xylophone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tubular bells" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"dulcimer" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"drawbar organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"percussive organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"rock organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"church organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"reed organ" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"accordion" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"harmonica" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"concertina" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic guitar (nylon)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic guitar (steel)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (jazz)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (clean)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric guitar (muted)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"overdriven guitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"distorted guitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic bass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric bass (finger)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"electric bass (pick)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fretless bass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"slap bass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"slap bass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth bass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth bass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"violin" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"viola" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"cello" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"contrabass" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tremolo strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pizzicato strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"orchestral strings" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"timpani" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"string ensemble 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"string ensemble 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthstrings 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthstrings 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"choir aahs" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"voice oohs" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth voice" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"orchestra hit" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trombone" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tuba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"muted trumpet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"french horn" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"brass section" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthbrass 1" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synthbrass 2" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"soprano sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"alto sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tenor sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"baritone sax" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"oboe" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"english horn" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bassoon" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clarinet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"piccolo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"flute" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"recorder" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pan flute" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"blown bottle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shakuhachi" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"whistle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"ocarina" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 1 (square)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 2 (sawtooth)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 3 (calliope)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 4 (chiff)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 5 (charang)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 6 (voice)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 7 (fifths)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"lead 8 (bass+lead)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 1 (new age)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 2 (warm)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 3 (polysynth)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 4 (choir)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 5 (bowed)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 6 (metallic)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 7 (halo)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"pad 8 (sweep)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 1 (rain)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 2 (soundtrack)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 3 (crystal)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 4 (atmosphere)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 5 (brightness)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 6 (goblins)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 7 (echoes)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fx 8 (sci-fi)" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"sitar" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"banjo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shamisen" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"koto" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"kalimba" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bagpipe" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"fiddle" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"shanai" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"tinkle bell" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"agogo" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"steel drums" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"woodblock" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"taiko drum" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"melodic tom" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"synth drum" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"reverse cymbal" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"guitar fret noise" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"breath noise" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"seashore" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"bird tweet" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"telephone ring" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"helicopter" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"applause" \melodie
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"gunshot" \melodie
}
>>
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="52/lily-d2f91df9.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="52/lily-d2f91df9.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="Templates"></a>
<h2 class="unnumbered">Templates</h2>
<p><a name="ancient-notation-template----modern-transcription-of-gregorian-music.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ancient notation template – modern transcription of gregorian music</h3>
<p>This example demonstrates how to do modern transcription of Gregorian
music. Gregorian music has no measure, no stems; it uses only half and
quarter note heads, and special marks, indicating rests of different
length.
<pre class="verbatim">
\include "gregorian-init.ly"
chant = \relative c' {
\set Score.timing = ##f
f4 a2 \divisioMinima
g4 b a2 f2 \divisioMaior
g4( f) f( g) a2 \finalis
}
verba = \lyricmode {
Lo -- rem ip -- sum do -- lor sit a -- met
}
\score {
\new Staff <<
\new Voice = "melody" \chant
\new Lyrics = "one" \lyricsto melody \verba
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Bar_engraver"
\override Stem #'transparent = ##t
}
\context {
\Voice
\override Stem #'length = #0
}
\context {
\Score
barAlways = ##t
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="92/lily-0f9ec382.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="92/lily-0f9ec382.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="ancient-notation-template----modern-transcription-of-mensural-music.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Ancient notation template – modern transcription of mensural music</h3>
<p>When transcribing mensural music, an incipit at the beginning of the
piece is useful to indicate the original key and tempo. While today
musicians are used to bar lines in order to faster recognize rhythmic
patterns, bar lines were not yet invented during the period of mensural
music; in fact, the meter often changed after every few notes. As a
compromise, bar lines are often printed between the staves rather than
on the staves.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\set Score.skipBars = ##t
% incipit
\once \override Score.SystemStartBracket #'transparent = ##t
\override Score.SpacingSpanner #'spacing-increment = #1.0 % tight spacing
\key f \major
\time 2/2
\once \override Staff.TimeSignature #'style = #'neomensural
\override Voice.NoteHead #'style = #'neomensural
\override Voice.Rest #'style = #'neomensural
\set Staff.printKeyCancellation = ##f
\cadenzaOn % turn off bar lines
\skip 1*10
\once \override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##f
\bar "||"
\skip 1*1 % need this extra \skip such that clef change comes
% after bar line
\bar ""
% main
\revert Score.SpacingSpanner #'spacing-increment % CHECK: no effect?
\cadenzaOff % turn bar lines on again
\once \override Staff.Clef #'full-size-change = ##t
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t
\key g \major
\time 4/4
\override Voice.NoteHead #'style = #'default
\override Voice.Rest #'style = #'default
% FIXME: setting printKeyCancellation back to #t must not
% occur in the first bar after the incipit. Dto. for forceClef.
% Therefore, we need an extra \skip.
\skip 1*1
\set Staff.printKeyCancellation = ##t
\set Staff.forceClef = ##f
\skip 1*7 % the actual music
% let finis bar go through all staves
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##f
% finis bar
\bar "|."
}
discantusNotes = {
\transpose c' c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Discantus "
% incipit
\clef "neomensural-c1"
c'1. s2 % two bars
\skip 1*8 % eight bars
\skip 1*1 % one bar
% main
\clef "treble"
d'2. d'4 |
b e' d'2 |
c'4 e'4.( d'8 c' b |
a4) b a2 |
b4.( c'8 d'4) c'4 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t c'1 |
b\breve |
}
}
discantusLyrics = \lyricmode {
% incipit
IV-
% main
Ju -- bi -- |
la -- te De -- |
o, om --
nis ter -- |
ra, __ om- |
"..." |
-us. |
}
altusNotes = {
\transpose c' c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Altus "
% incipit
\clef "neomensural-c3"
r1 % one bar
f1. s2 % two bars
\skip 1*7 % seven bars
\skip 1*1 % one bar
% main
\clef "treble"
r2 g2. e4 fis g | % two bars
a2 g4 e |
fis g4.( fis16 e fis4) |
g1 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t g1 |
g\breve |
}
}
altusLyrics = \lyricmode {
% incipit
IV-
% main
Ju -- bi -- la -- te | % two bars
De -- o, om -- |
nis ter -- ra, |
"..." |
-us. |
}
tenorNotes = {
\transpose c' c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Tenor "
% incipit
\clef "neomensural-c4"
r\longa % four bars
r\breve % two bars
r1 % one bar
c'1. s2 % two bars
\skip 1*1 % one bar
\skip 1*1 % one bar
% main
\clef "treble_8"
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
r2 d'2. d'4 b e' | % two bars
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t e'1 |
d'\breve |
}
}
tenorLyrics = \lyricmode {
% incipit
IV-
% main
Ju -- bi -- la -- te | % two bars
"..." |
-us. |
}
bassusNotes = {
\transpose c' c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bassus "
% incipit
\clef "bass"
r\maxima % eight bars
f1. s2 % two bars
\skip 1*1 % one bar
% main
\clef "bass"
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
R1 |
g2. e4 |
\once \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t e1 |
g\breve |
}
}
bassusLyrics = \lyricmode {
% incipit
IV-
% main
Ju -- bi- |
"..." |
-us. |
}
\score {
\new StaffGroup = choirStaff <<
\new Voice =
"discantusNotes" << \global \discantusNotes >>
\new Lyrics =
"discantusLyrics" \lyricsto discantusNotes { \discantusLyrics }
\new Voice =
"altusNotes" << \global \altusNotes >>
\new Lyrics =
"altusLyrics" \lyricsto altusNotes { \altusLyrics }
\new Voice =
"tenorNotes" << \global \tenorNotes >>
\new Lyrics =
"tenorLyrics" \lyricsto tenorNotes { \tenorLyrics }
\new Voice =
"bassusNotes" << \global \bassusNotes >>
\new Lyrics =
"bassusLyrics" \lyricsto bassusNotes { \bassusLyrics }
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
% no bars in staves
\override BarLine #'transparent = ##t
% incipit should not start with a start delimiter
\remove "System_start_delimiter_engraver"
}
\context {
\Voice
% no slurs
\override Slur #'transparent = ##t
% Comment in the below "\remove" command to allow line
% breaking also at those barlines where a note overlaps
% into the next bar. The command is commented out in this
% short example score, but especially for large scores, you
% will typically yield better line breaking and thus improve
% overall spacing if you comment in the following command.
%\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="a9/lily-f99b5fb1.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="a9/lily-f99b5fb1.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="jazz-combo-template.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Jazz combo template</h3>
<p>This is quite an advanced template, for a jazz ensemble. Note that all
instruments are notated in <code>\key c \major</code>. This refers to the
key in concert pitch; the key will be automatically transposed if the
music is within a <code>\transpose</code> section.
<pre class="verbatim">
\header {
title = "Song"
subtitle = "(tune)"
composer = "Me"
meter = "moderato"
piece = "Swing"
tagline = \markup {
\column {
"LilyPond example file by Amelie Zapf,"
"Berlin 07/07/2003"
}
}
}
%#(set-global-staff-size 16)
\include "english.ly"
%%%%%%%%%%%% Some macros %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
sl = {
\override NoteHead #'style = #'slash
\override Stem #'transparent = ##t
}
nsl = {
\revert NoteHead #'style
\revert Stem #'transparent
}
crOn = \override NoteHead #'style = #'cross
crOff = \revert NoteHead #'style
%% insert chord name style stuff here.
jazzChords = { }
%%%%%%%%%%%% Keys'n'thangs %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
global = { \time 4/4 }
Key = { \key c \major }
% ############ Horns ############
% ------ Trumpet ------
trpt = \transpose c d \relative c'' {
\Key
c1 | c | c |
}
trpHarmony = \transpose c' d {
\jazzChords
}
trumpet = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Trumpet"
\clef treble
<<
\trpt
>>
}
% ------ Alto Saxophone ------
alto = \transpose c a \relative c' {
\Key
c1 | c | c |
}
altoHarmony = \transpose c' a {
\jazzChords
}
altoSax = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Alto Sax"
\clef treble
<<
\alto
>>
}
% ------ Baritone Saxophone ------
bari = \transpose c a' \relative c {
\Key
c1
c1
\sl
d4^"Solo" d d d
\nsl
}
bariHarmony = \transpose c' a \chordmode {
\jazzChords s1 s d2:maj e:m7
}
bariSax = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bari Sax"
\clef treble
<<
\bari
>>
}
% ------ Trombone ------
tbone = \relative c {
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
tboneHarmony = \chordmode {
\jazzChords
}
trombone = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Trombone"
\clef bass
<<
\tbone
>>
}
% ############ Rhythm Section #############
% ------ Guitar ------
gtr = \relative c'' {
\Key
c1
\sl
b4 b b b
\nsl
c1
}
gtrHarmony = \chordmode {
\jazzChords
s1 c2:min7+ d2:maj9
}
guitar = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Guitar"
\clef treble
<<
\gtr
>>
}
%% ------ Piano ------
rhUpper = \relative c'' {
\voiceOne
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
rhLower = \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
\Key
e1 | e | e
}
lhUpper = \relative c' {
\voiceOne
\Key
g1 | g | g
}
lhLower = \relative c {
\voiceTwo
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
PianoRH = {
\clef treble
\global
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"acoustic grand"
<<
\new Voice = "one" \rhUpper
\new Voice = "two" \rhLower
>>
}
PianoLH = {
\clef bass
\global
\set Staff.midiInstrument = "acoustic grand"
<<
\new Voice = "one" \lhUpper
\new Voice = "two" \lhLower
>>
}
piano = {
<<
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"Piano"
\new Staff = "upper" \PianoRH
\new Staff = "lower" \PianoLH
>>
}
% ------ Bass Guitar ------
Bass = \relative c {
\Key
c1 | c | c
}
bass = {
\global
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Bass"
\clef bass
<<
\Bass
>>
}
% ------ Drums ------
up = \drummode {
\voiceOne
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn>
}
down = \drummode {
\voiceTwo
bd4 s bd s
bd4 s bd s
bd4 s bd s
}
drumContents = {
\global
<<
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = #"Drums"
\new DrumVoice \up
\new DrumVoice \down
>>
}
%%%%%%%%% It All Goes Together Here %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\score {
<<
\new StaffGroup = "horns" <<
\new Staff = "trumpet" \trumpet
\new Staff = "altosax" \altoSax
\new ChordNames = "barichords" \bariHarmony
\new Staff = "barisax" \bariSax
\new Staff = "trombone" \trombone
>>
\new StaffGroup = "rhythm" <<
\new ChordNames = "chords" \gtrHarmony
\new Staff = "guitar" \guitar
\new PianoStaff = "piano" \piano
\new Staff = "bass" \bass
\new DrumStaff \drumContents
>>
>>
\layout {
\context { \RemoveEmptyStaffContext }
\context {
\Score
\override BarNumber #'padding = #3
\override RehearsalMark #'padding = #2
skipBars = ##t
}
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="ea/lily-36b7ad93.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="ea/lily-36b7ad93.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-simple.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template (simple)</h3>
<p>Here is a simple piano staff with some notes.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"Piano "
\new Staff = "upper" \upper
\new Staff = "lower" \lower
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="33/lily-72cc9456.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="33/lily-72cc9456.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-centered-dynamics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with centered dynamics</h3>
<p>Many piano scores have the dynamics centered between the two staves.
This requires a bit of tweaking to implement, but since the template is
right here, you don't have to do the tweaking yourself.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
dynamics = {
s2\fff\> s4 s\!\pp
}
pedal = {
s2\sustainOn s\sustainOff
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" \upper
\new Dynamics = "dynamics" \dynamics
\new Staff = "lower" <<
\clef bass
\lower
>>
\new Dynamics = "pedal" \pedal
>>
\layout {
\context {
\type "Engraver_group"
\name Dynamics
% So that \cresc works, for example.
\alias Voice
\consists "Output_property_engraver"
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-1 . 1)
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'Y-offset = #0
pedalSustainStrings = #'("Ped." "*Ped." "*")
pedalUnaCordaStrings = #'("una corda" "" "tre corde")
\consists "Piano_pedal_engraver"
\consists "Script_engraver"
\consists "Dynamic_engraver"
\consists "Text_engraver"
\override TextScript #'font-size = #2
\override TextScript #'font-shape = #'italic
\consists "Skip_event_swallow_translator"
\consists "Axis_group_engraver"
}
\context {
\PianoStaff
\accepts Dynamics
}
}
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" << \upper \dynamics \pedal >>
\new Staff = "lower" << \lower \dynamics \pedal >>
>>
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="81/lily-165c7953.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="81/lily-165c7953.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-centered-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with centered lyrics</h3>
<p>Instead of having a full staff for the melody and lyrics, lyrics can be
centered between the staves of a piano staff.
<pre class="verbatim">
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
\score {
\new GrandStaff <<
\new Staff = upper { \new Voice = "singer" \upper }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "singer" \text
\new Staff = lower { \lower }
>>
\layout {
\context {
\GrandStaff
\accepts "Lyrics"
}
\context {
\Lyrics
\consists "Bar_engraver"
}
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="37/lily-c18abd8d.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="37/lily-c18abd8d.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="piano-template-with-melody-and-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Piano template with melody and lyrics</h3>
<p>Here is a typical song format: one staff with the melody and lyrics,
with piano accompaniment underneath.
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a b c d
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
upper = \relative c'' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
lower = \relative c {
\clef bass
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a2 c
}
\score {
<<
\new Voice = "mel" { \autoBeamOff \melody }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto mel \text
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "upper" \upper
\new Staff = "lower" \lower
>>
>>
\layout {
\context { \RemoveEmptyStaffContext }
}
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="68/lily-e6876100.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="68/lily-e6876100.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="score-for-diatonic-accordion.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Score for diatonic accordion</h3>
<p>A template to write a score for a diatonic accordion.
<p>- There is a horizontal staff indicating if the accordion must be
pushed (thick line) or pulled (thin line)
<p>- There is a small rhythmic staff with lyrics that describes the bass
buttons to press. The bar lines are made from gridlines
<p>- The tabulator staff for diatonic accordions shows the geographic
position of the buttons and not (as for every other instrument) the
pitch of the notes; the keys on the melody-side of the accordion are
placed in three columns and about 12 rows
<p>In the tabulator staff notation the outermost column is described with
notes between lines, the innermost column is described with notes
between lines and a cross as accidental, and the middle column is
described with notes on a line, whereby the row in the middle is
represented on the middle line in the staff.
<p>Some words to transpose piano notes to the diatonic accordion:
<p>1. Every diatonic accordion is built for some keys only (for example,
for the keys of C major and F major), so it is important to transpose a
piano melody to match one of these keys. Transpose the source code, not
only the output because this code is required later on to translate it
once more to the tabulator staff. This can be done with the command
<code>displayLilyMusic</code>.
<p>2. You have to alternate the push- and pull-direction of the accordion
regularly. If the player has a too long part to pull the accordion gets
broken. On the other hand, some harmonies are only available in one
direction. Considering this, decide which parts of the melody are the
push-parts and which the pull-parts.
<p>3. For each pull- or push-part translate the piano notes to the
according tabulature representation.
<p>This snippet comes with a useful optional macro for the jEdit text
editor.
<pre class="verbatim">
verse = \lyricmode { Wie gross bist du! Wie gross bist du! }
harmonies = \new ChordNames \chordmode {
\germanChords
\set chordChanges = ##t
bes8 bes8 bes8
es2 f
bes1
}
NoStem = \override Stem #'transparent = ##t
NoNoteHead = \override NoteHead #'transparent = ##t
ZeroBeam = \override Beam #'positions = #'(0 . 0)
staffTabLine = \new Staff \with {
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\remove "Clef_engraver"
} {
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'(0)
% Shows one horizontal line. The vertical line (simulating a bar-line) is simulated with a gridline
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"choir aahs"
\key c \major
\relative c''
{
% disable the following line to see the the noteheads while writing the song
\NoNoteHead
\override NoteHead #'no-ledgers = ##t
% The beam between 8th-notes is used to draw the push-line
%How to fast write the push-lines:
% 1. write repeatedly 'c c c c c c c c |' for the whole length of the song
% 2. uncomment the line \NoNoteHead
% 3. compile
% 4. Mark the positions on which push/pull changes.
% In the score-picture click on the position the push- or pull-part starts
% (on the noteHead, the cursor will change to a hand-icon).
% The cursor in the source code will jump just at this position.
% a) If a push-part starts there, replace the 'c' by an 'e['
% b) If a pull-part starts there, replace the 'c' by an 's'
% 5. Switch into 'overwrite-mode' by pressing the 'ins' key.
% 6. For the pull-parts overwrite the 'c' with 's'
% 7. For every push-part replace the last 'c' with 'e]'
% 8. Switch into 'insert-mode' again
% 9. At last it should look lik e.g. (s s e[ c | c c c c c c c c | c c c c c c e] s s)
% 10. re-enable the line \NoNoteHead
\autoBeamOff
\ZeroBeam
s8 s s e[ c c c c c c e] | s s s s s
}
}
%{
%}
% Accordion melody in tabulator score
% 1. Place a copy of the piano melody below
% 2. Separate piano melody into pull- and push-parts according to the staffTabLine you've already made
% 3. For each line: Double the line. Remark the 1st one (Keeps unchanged as reference) and then change the second line using the transformation paper
% or the macros 'conv2diaton push.bsh' and 'conv2diaton pull.bsh'
% Tips:
% - In jEdit Search & Replace mark the Option 'Keep Dialog'
AccordionTabTwoCBesDur = {
% pull 1
%<f' bes'>8 <f' a'>8 <d' bes'>8 |
<g'' a''>8 <g'' b''>8 <e'' a''>8 |
% push 2
%<g' c''>4 <f' d''> <g' ees''> <f' a'> |
<g'' a''>4 <d'' eisis''> <g'' bisis''> <d'' f''> |
% pull 3
% <f' bes'>2 r8 }
<g'' a''>2 r8 }
AccordionTab= { \dynamicUp
% 1. Place a copy of the piano melody above
% 2. Separate piano melody into pull- and push-parts according to the staffTabLine you've already made
% 3. For each line: Double the line. Remark the 1st one (Keeps unchanged as reference) and then
% change the second line using the transformation paper
% Tips:
% - In jEdit Search & Replace mark the Option 'Keep Dialog'
% -
\AccordionTabTwoCBesDur
}
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Grid_point_engraver"
gridInterval = #(ly:make-moment 4 4) % 4/4 - tact. How many beats per bar
% The following line has to be adjusted O-F-T-E-N.
\override GridPoint #'Y-extent = #'(-2 . -21)
}
\context {
\ChoirStaff
\remove "System_start_delimiter_engraver"
}
}
staffVoice = \new Staff=astaffvoice {
\time 4/4
\set Staff.instrumentName="Voice"
\set Staff.midiInstrument="voice oohs"
\key bes \major
\partial 8*3
\clef treble
{
\context Voice = "melodyVoi"
{ <f' bes'>8 <f' a'>8 <d' bes'>8 | <g' c''>4 <f' d''> <g' es''> <f' a'> | <f' bes'>2 r8 }
\bar "|."
}
}
staffAccordionMel = \new Staff \with { \remove "Clef_engraver" } {
#(set-accidental-style 'forget) %Set the accidentals (Vorzeichen) for each note,
%do not remember them for the rest of the measure.
\time 4/4
\set Staff.instrumentName="Accordion"
\set Staff.midiInstrument="voice oohs"
\key c \major
\clef treble
{ \AccordionTab \bar "|." }
}
AltOn = #(define-music-function (parser location mag) (number?)
#{ \override Stem #'length = #$(* 7.0 mag)
\override NoteHead #'font-size =
#$(inexact->exact (* (/ 6.0 (log 2.0)) (log mag))) #})
AltOff = {
\revert Stem #'length
\revert NoteHead #'font-size
}
BassRhytm = {s4 s8 | c2 c2 | c2 s8 }
LyricBassRhythmI= \lyricmode { c b | c }
staffBassRhytm = \new Staff=staffbass \with { \remove "Clef_engraver" } {
% This is not a RhythmicStaff because it must be possible to append lyrics.
\override Score.GridLine #'extra-offset = #'( 13.0 . 0.0 ) % x.y
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'( 0 )
% Shows one horizontal line. The vertical line (simulating a bar-line) is simulated by a grid
% Search for 'grid' in this page to find all related functions
\time 4/4
{
\context Voice = "VoiceBassRhytm"
\stemDown \AltOn #0.6
\relative c''
{
\BassRhytm
}
\AltOff
\bar "|."
}
}
\new Score
\with {
\consists "Grid_line_span_engraver" %The vertical line (simulating a bar-line) in the staffBassRhytm is a gridline
}
\new ChoirStaff
<<
\harmonies
\staffVoice
\context Lyrics = "lmelodyVoi" \with {alignBelowContext=astaffvoice} { \lyricsto "melodyVoi" \verse }
\staffAccordionMel
\staffTabLine
\staffBassRhytm
\context Lyrics = "lBassRhytmAboveI" \with {alignAboveContext=staffbass} \lyricsto VoiceBassRhytm \LyricBassRhythmI
>>
%}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="4b/lily-02698a8a.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="4b/lily-02698a8a.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes,-lyrics,-and-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes, lyrics, and chords</h3>
<p>This template allows the preparation of a song with melody, words, and
chords.
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
harmonies = \chordmode {
a2 c
}
\score {
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set chordChanges = ##t
\harmonies
}
\new Voice = "one" { \autoBeamOff \melody }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="2c/lily-39f4b2ad.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="2c/lily-39f4b2ad.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes,-lyrics,-chords-and-frets.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes, lyrics, chords and frets</h3>
<p>Here is a simple lead sheet template with melody, lyrics, chords and
fret diagrams.
<pre class="verbatim">
% Define the fret diagrams to be used
cFretDiagram = \markup {
\fret-diagram #"6-x;5-3-3;4-2-2;3-o;2-1-1;1-o;"
}
gFretDiagram = \markup {
\fret-diagram #"6-3-2;5-2-1;4-o;3-o;2-o;1-3-3;"
}
verseI = \lyricmode {
\set stanza = #"1."
This is the first verse
}
verseII = \lyricmode {
\set stanza = #"2."
This is the second verse.
}
theChords = \new ChordNames {
\chordmode {
% insert the chords for chordnames here
c2 g4 c
}
}
staffMelody = \new Staff {
\context Voice = "voiceMelody" {
\key c \major
\clef treble
\relative c' {
% Type notes and fret diagram markups here
c4^\cFretDiagram d8 e f4^\gFretDiagram g^\cFretDiagram
\bar "|."
}
}
}
\score {
<<
\theChords
\staffMelody
\new Lyrics = "lyricsI" \lyricmode {
\lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseI
}
\new Lyrics = "lyricsII" \lyricmode {
\lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseII
}
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="65/lily-041c2551.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="65/lily-041c2551.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes-and-chords.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes and chords</h3>
<p>Want to prepare a lead sheet with a melody and chords? Look no further!
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
f4 e8[ c] d4 g
a2 ~ a
}
harmonies = \chordmode {
c4:m f:min7 g:maj c:aug
d2:dim b:sus
}
\score {
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set chordChanges = ##t
\harmonies
}
\new Staff \melody
>>
\layout{ }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="dd/lily-c67e885a.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="dd/lily-c67e885a.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-notes-and-lyrics.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with notes and lyrics</h3>
<p>This small template demonstrates a simple melody with lyrics. Cut and
paste, add notes, then words for the lyrics. This example turns off
automatic beaming, which is common for vocal parts. To use automatic
beaming, change or comment out the relevant line.
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
text = \lyricmode {
Aaa Bee Cee Dee
}
\score{
<<
\new Voice = "one" {
\autoBeamOff
\melody
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="31/lily-35228590.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="31/lily-35228590.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="single-staff-template-with-only-notes.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Single staff template with only notes</h3>
<p>This very simple template gives you a staff with notes, suitable for a
solo instrument or a melodic fragment. Cut and paste this into a file,
add notes, and you're finished!
<pre class="verbatim">
melody = \relative c' {
\clef treble
\key c \major
\time 4/4
a4 b c d
}
\score {
\new Staff \melody
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="cc/lily-b158a613.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="cc/lily-b158a613.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="string-quartet-template-simple.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">String quartet template (simple)</h3>
<p>This template demonstrates a simple string quartet. It also uses a
<code>\global</code> section for time and key signatures
<pre class="verbatim">
global= {
\time 4/4
\key c \major
}
violinOne = \new Voice \relative c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin 1 "
c2 d
e1
\bar "|."
}
violinTwo = \new Voice \relative c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin 2 "
g2 f
e1
\bar "|."
}
viola = \new Voice \relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Viola "
\clef alto
e2 d
c1
\bar "|."
}
cello = \new Voice \relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Cello "
\clef bass
c2 b
a1
\bar "|."
}
\score {
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff << \global \violinOne >>
\new Staff << \global \violinTwo >>
\new Staff << \global \viola >>
\new Staff << \global \cello >>
>>
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="c0/lily-052deeba.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="c0/lily-052deeba.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="string-quartet-template-with-separate-parts.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">String quartet template with separate parts</h3>
<p>The "String quartet template" snippet produces a nice string quartet,
but what if you needed to print parts? This new template demonstrates
how to use the <code>\tag</code> feature to easily split a piece into
individual parts.
<p>You need to split this template into separate files; the filenames are
contained in comments at the beginning of each file. <code>piece.ly</code>
contains all the music definitions. The other files – <code>score.ly</code>,
<code>vn1.ly</code>, <code>vn2.ly</code>, <code>vla.ly</code>, and <code>vlc.ly</code> –
produce the appropriate part.
<p>Do not forget to remove specified comments when using separate files!
<pre class="verbatim">
%%%%% piece.ly
%%%%% (This is the global definitions file)
global= {
\time 4/4
\key c \major
}
Violinone = \new Voice { \relative c''{
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin 1 "
c2 d e1
\bar "|." }} %*********************************
Violintwo = \new Voice { \relative c''{
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin 2 "
g2 f e1
\bar "|." }} %*********************************
Viola = \new Voice { \relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Viola "
\clef alto
e2 d c1
\bar "|." }} %*********************************
Cello = \new Voice { \relative c' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Cello "
\clef bass
c2 b a1
\bar "|."}} %**********************************
music = {
<<
\tag #'score \tag #'vn1 \new Staff { << \global \Violinone >> }
\tag #'score \tag #'vn2 \new Staff { << \global \Violintwo>> }
\tag #'score \tag #'vla \new Staff { << \global \Viola>> }
\tag #'score \tag #'vlc \new Staff { << \global \Cello>> }
>>
}
%%% These are the other files you need to save on your computer
%%%%% score.ly
%%%%% (This is the main file)
%\include "piece.ly" %%% uncomment this line when using a separate file
#(set-global-staff-size 14)
\score {
\new StaffGroup \keepWithTag #'score \music
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
%{ Uncomment this block when using separate files
%%%%% vn1.ly
%%%%% (This is the Violin 1 part file)
\include "piece.ly"
\score {
\keepWithTag #'vn1 \music
\layout { }
}
%%%%% vn2.ly
%%%%% (This is the Violin 2 part file)
\include "piece.ly"
\score {
\keepWithTag #'vn2 \music
\layout { }
}
%%%%% vla.ly
%%%%% (This is the Viola part file)
\include "piece.ly"
\score {
\keepWithTag #'vla \music
\layout { }
}
%%%%% vlc.ly
%%%%% (This is the Cello part file)
\include "piece.ly"
\score {
\keepWithTag #'vlc \music
\layout { }
}
%}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="8c/lily-5f210b23.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="8c/lily-5f210b23.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template-with-automatic-piano-reduction.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template with automatic piano reduction</h3>
<p>This template adds an automatic piano reduction to the standard SATB
vocal score demonstrated in "Vocal ensemble template". This
demonstrates one of the strengths of LilyPond – you can use a music
definition more than once. If any changes are made to the vocal notes
(say, <code>tenorMusic</code>), then the changes will also apply to the piano
reduction.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords =\lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
<<
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Lyrics = sopranos { s1 }
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = sopranos { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> }
\new Voice = altos { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics = altos { s1 }
\new Lyrics = tenors { s1 }
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = tenors { \voiceOne <<\global \tenorMusic >> }
\new Voice = basses { \voiceTwo <<\global \bassMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics = basses { s1 }
\context Lyrics = sopranos \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\context Lyrics = altos \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\context Lyrics = tenors \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\context Lyrics = basses \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff <<
\set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f
\partcombine
<< \global \sopMusic >>
<< \global \altoMusic >>
>>
\new Staff <<
\clef bass
\set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f
\partcombine
<< \global \tenorMusic >>
<< \global \bassMusic >>
>>
>>
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="99/lily-1164d362.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="99/lily-1164d362.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template-with-lyrics-aligned-below-and-above-the-staves.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template with lyrics aligned below and above the staves</h3>
<p>This template is basically the same as the simple "Vocal ensemble"
template, with the exception that here all the lyrics lines are placed
using <code>alignAboveContext</code> and <code>alignBelowContext</code>.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords = \lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> }
\new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = women } \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = women } \lyricsto altos \altoWords
% we could remove the line about this with the line below, since we want
% the alto lyrics to be below the alto Voice anyway.
% \new Lyrics \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> }
\new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> }
>>
\new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = men } \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = men } \lyricsto basses \bassWords
% again, we could replace the line above this with the line below.
% \new Lyrics \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="f3/lily-a11d4879.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="f3/lily-a11d4879.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<p><a name="vocal-ensemble-template.ly"></a>
<h3 class="unnumberedsec">Vocal ensemble template</h3>
<p>Here is a standard four-part SATB vocal score. With larger ensembles,
it is often useful to include a section which is included in all parts.
For example, the time signature and key signature are almost always the
same for all parts. Like in the "Hymn" template, the four voices are
regrouped on only two staves.
<pre class="verbatim">
global = {
\key c \major
\time 4/4
}
sopMusic = \relative c'' {
c4 c c8[( b)] c4
}
sopWords = \lyricmode {
hi hi hi hi
}
altoMusic = \relative c' {
e4 f d e
}
altoWords = \lyricmode {
ha ha ha ha
}
tenorMusic = \relative c' {
g4 a f g
}
tenorWords = \lyricmode {
hu hu hu hu
}
bassMusic = \relative c {
c4 c g c
}
bassWords = \lyricmode {
ho ho ho ho
}
\score {
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Lyrics = sopranos { s1 }
\new Staff = women <<
\new Voice = "sopranos" {
\voiceOne
<< \global \sopMusic >>
}
\new Voice = "altos" {
\voiceTwo
<< \global \altoMusic >>
}
>>
\new Lyrics = "altos" { s1 }
\new Lyrics = "tenors" { s1 }
\new Staff = men <<
\clef bass
\new Voice = "tenors" {
\voiceOne
<< \global \tenorMusic >>
}
\new Voice = "basses" {
\voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >>
}
>>
\new Lyrics = basses { s1 }
\context Lyrics = sopranos \lyricsto sopranos \sopWords
\context Lyrics = altos \lyricsto altos \altoWords
\context Lyrics = tenors \lyricsto tenors \tenorWords
\context Lyrics = basses \lyricsto basses \bassWords
>>
\layout {
\context {
% a little smaller so lyrics
% can be closer to the staff
\Staff
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'minimum-Y-extent = #'(-3 . 3)
}
}
}
</pre>
<p>
<a href="b2/lily-b266ca1f.ly">
<img align="middle"
border="0" src="b2/lily-b266ca1f.png" alt="[image of music]">
</a>
</p>
<!-- footer_tag -->
<div style="background-color: #e8ffe8; padding: 2; border: #c0ffc0 1px solid;">
<p>
<font size="-1">
This page is for LilyPond-2.11.57 (development-branch).
<br>
<address>
Report errors to <a href="http://post.gmane.org/post.php?group=gmane.comp.gnu.lilypond.bugs">http://post.gmane.org/post.php?group=gmane.comp.gnu.lilypond.bugs</a>. </address>
<br>
Your <a href="http://lilypond.org/web/devel/participating/documentation-adding">suggestions for the documentation</a> are welcome.
</font>
</p>
</div>
</BODY></html>
<!--
Local Variables:
coding: utf-8
End:
-->
